2. 第二品释义显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyakaṇḍa vaṇṇanā
就部分与整体的关系而言:所谓“二二”(语尾),是指以syādi等语尾所构成的整体,与其各部分之间的关系。此时,要么注疏(pañcikā)应随顺释文(vutti),要么释文应随顺注疏,然而此处并未见到二者相互随顺。譬如,释文中仅将“从表达一、多等义的名词”作为词干的限定语,而注疏中却以此限定语兼作语尾义的限定语来显示意义,由此便知二者互不随顺。因此,我们将在此解释如何使二者相互随顺。若谓:“倘若注疏随顺释文,则‘他们……于一二等义中’及‘因此……应连接’等语尾义的主张便须舍弃;由于这些内容被舍弃,将导致大量文句缺失。然而,若释文随顺注疏,则只需在释文中稍作增补,便不致有大量缺失,故释文应为:‘二二(语尾)从表达一、多等义的名词而生。’”如此,便与论师之意相符。因为经文中说“二二(语尾)于一二等义中,从名词而有”,将此“于一二等义中”作为语尾的限定语,亦属合理。显示巴利原文
Avayavasambandheti syādyavayavīsamudāyena dvedveti vuttānamavayavānaṃ sambandhe, atettha vutyanukūlāya pañcikāya vā bhavitabbaṃ, pañcikānu kūlāya vuttiyā vā, na cettha dvinnamaññoññānukūlatā dissati, tathāhi vuttiyaṃ-‘ekānekatthesu vattamānato nāmasmā’ti ettakameva pakativisesanavasena vuttaṃ, pañcikāyantu tabbisesana vasena ca paccayatthavisesanavasena ca attho dassito, tadeva mubhinnannāññamaññānukūlatā dissati, tato ettha yathā dvinnamaññoññānukūlatā sampajjati, tathā byācikkhissāma ‘‘yadi panettha vutyānukūlā pañcikā bhaveyya paccayatthapakkho jahitabbo siyāti ‘te…pe… ekānekatthesu’ti ca, tena…pe… yojaniya’nti ca etesaṃ jahitabbatāya bahupāṭhavilopo āpajjati, yadi pana pañcikānukūlā vutti bhaveyya vuttiyaṃ kiñcimattaṃ pakkhipitabba mattameva siyāti bahuvilopāpatti (na) hotīti etesaṃ dvedve honti ekāne katthesu vattamānato nāmasmā’ti vuttiyā bhavitabba’’nti, evañhi sati satthantarenāpi saha ghaṭate, sutte ‘dvedvekānekesu nāmasmā’ti vuttattā ‘ekānekesū’ti idaṃ paccayavisesanaṃ vā yujjati
或者,当此“于一二等义中”作为语尾的限定语时,依其内在义力(sāmatthiya),也同样可获得作为词干限定语的“于一二等义中”。所谓内在义力,即指义理之力。譬如,存在于“一”等义中的词干,其所表达的一性、多性等,其本身唯是义理、量等自性,而syādi等语尾则是这些一性等的阐明者。那么,语尾如何从表达一性等义的名词而有,而非从他处?——如此便如所说,遮遣了名词的特定性。同样,对于阴性等语尾,虽未明说词干的限定,但由于从词根等所表达的意义并不存在,依内在义力,便知是从彼词干而有;语尾不会从词根、后缀等生起。同样,ṇādi等语尾……因其是加在语尾之后而制定,当此为词干的限定语时,也依内在义力,从表达一性等义的名词,为阐明他们,而生的syādi语尾,又岂能于他处生起?实不可能。由此便获得了“于一二等义中,二二(语尾)生起”的理解。又,即使未以自身形式明说,但依内在义力可理解为“于一二等义中”,这便等于已说,故应视为已说出“他们……”等义。为何要说“从表达一、多等义的名词”?因为非存在。显示巴利原文
Pakativisesanavasena vā yadetaṃ paccayavisesanaṃ, tadā sāmatthiyā ekānekesūti pakativisesanampi labbhati, tattha sāmatthiyamattha balaṃ, tathāhyekādīsu bhavantā pakativāccānamevekattādiabyati rittaatthamattādīrūpānaṃ jotakā syādayo kathamekattādīsu vattamānato nāmasmā aññato siyunti yathāvuttanāmavisesākkhepo, tathā itthiṇādippaccayādīnampi pana pakativisesānupādānepi yato dhātvādi vāccottho natthi, sāmatthiyā tato, dhātutyādyantehi na honte vittipaccayā, tathā ṇādipaccayāpi… vibhatyantā vidhānato, yadetampakativisesanaṃ tadāpi sāmatthiyeneva ekattādīsu vattamānato nāmasmā tajjotanāya bhavantā syādayo kathamaññattha honti asambhavāti ekānekesu dvedveti labbhati, athavā sarūpena avuttampi sāmatthiyenekānekatthesūti gammamānaṃ vuttameva hotīti katvā‘tecā’tiādikaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ, ekānekesu vattamānato nāmasmāti kimatthaṃ asatvabhūtāya kiriyāyekattādisambandhābhāvā kriyatthāca tyādīhi yevekattādīnaṃ vuttattā tyādyantehi ca na bhaveyyunti payojanantaramāha-‘yampanā’tiādi, pañcakanāmatthassādhippetabhāvo cettha pakkhassetasseva yuttattā. Tathāhi saṅkhyākammādayo nāma vāccassa dabbassa dhammo sakattho-pasajjano ca saddo dabbeyeva vattate… dabbeyevānyanayādivohārā, tattha dabbavācinā saddena dabbadhammānamabbhantarīkaraṇanti nāyuttametaṃ nāmena pañcannamabhidhānaṃ, vibhattiyo pana jotikā, itthipaccayā ca itthiliṅgassa, tathā cāmhehi vuttaṃ sambandhacintāyaṃ–
Saddo sakatthaṃ vatvāna, padatthaṃ dabbasaññitaṃ; Samavetaṃ vade liṅgaṃ, saṅkhyaṃ kammādikammi ceti.
为了依次显示syādi语尾在一、多等义中的情形,故说“因此……”等。“因此(tena)”:即由于认可了五义的名词义,且syādi语尾将被制定于“一”等应被阐明的义中,以此之故。“于一切处(sabbattha)”:即在“aṃ”、“yo”等一切处。所谓“自性”等的意趣如下:“虽然syādi语尾见于一、多等义中,但‘一’等词用于指称以数量所限定的义,而非仅指数量本身。数量不可能直接作为语尾义,它存在于所数之物中,因此数量也非syādi语尾之义。”不仅实体等自义不是syādi语尾之义,数量亦非——此即“也(api)”字之义。由此,在显示“名词具五义”时,数量、动作等由语尾所阐明,从而排除了“数量为语尾义”、“名词具四义”等主张。而在显示“名词具三义”时,数量、动作等便成为语尾所表达之义。今为以自体形式显示所许五义名词义中的自义等,故说“其中……”等。其中,“自义”即限定语:凡以限定语方式所欲表示的自性等任何一者,即名为“自义”。他显示此:“自性、种类、功德、显示巴利原文
Ekānekesu syādīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘tenā’tiādi vuttaṃ, tenāti yena pañcako nāmattho adhippeto ekādīsu ca atthesu jo-tanīyesu syādayo vidhiyissanti tena, sabbatthāti ‘aṃyo’ādīsu sabbattha, sabhāvatotyādikassāyamadhippāyo ‘‘yadyapi syādayo ekānekesu honti tathāpi ekādayo saṅkhyāya paricchinne atthe vattanti na saṅkhyāmatte, saṅkhyāya sambhavābhāvā saṅkhyeye bhavatīti na saṅkhyāpi syādīnamattho’’ti (na) kevalaṃ sakattha dabbādiyeva syādīnamattho na bhavati, api tu saṅkhyāpītyapisaddattho, anena saṅkhyā vibhatyattho catukko nāmatthotyayampakkho nirākato pañcako nāmatthoti dassane saṅkhyākammādīnaṃ vibhattiyo jotikā honti, tiko nāmatthoti dassane tu saṅkhyākammādayo vibhattivāccā honti, idāni adhippetapañcakanāmatthe sakatthādikaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘tatthā’tiādimāha, tattha sakattho visesananti sarūpādi yaṃ kiñci visesanattena vattumicchitaṃ taṃ sakattho nāmati attho, taṃ dasseti ‘sarūpajātiguṇadabbāni’ti.
依于力用,在诸如“牛”等不同的对象上,它转起;
此即是‘种类’:犹如丝线贯穿花朵一般,能令不同的事物中生起无差别的知觉与名称。
凡具‘有’与‘非有’之自性者,即被视为功德,而非无功德。
显示巴利原文 Balena yassā bhinnesu, pavattante gagādīsu; Sā jātyabhinnadhīsaddā, suttaṃ pupphesvivānvītaṃ. Dabbādhāro tato bhinno, nimittaṃ tappatītiyā; Bhāvābhāvasabhāvo yo, so guṇo nigguṇo mato. Sarūpaṃ saddarūpaṃva, jātiyā yaṃ visesanaṃ; Visesīyati yaṃkiñci, dabbaṃ taṃ samudīritaṃ.
现在,为了显示形色等差别者的自义状态,以及生类等差别的实物状态,他说“其中”等。关于“音声依其自形而起作用”,他以差别之假说而说“以音声的自形”。然而在此,当“牛”这一仅表示生类总体的音声被使用时,牛的音声仅带来生类总体,因此它确实区分了生类。以“杖”等音声,通过假说而把握了与杖等共行的(人),因此他说“实物也成为其他实物的差别者”,即“以杖等实物,与杖等共行的人们被区分”。“令持杖者进入”的意思是:令具有杖实物所言之杖的差别之人进入。“令持矛者进入”此处也是同样的道理。除了如前所说的四种自义之外,还有其他自义,因此他说“在某些情况下”等。“关系为因”的意思是:关系是因、是条件,对于此缘的生起而言,这是缘的(因),如此构成复合词。因为在此,“他有杖”中的“他”,即所有者的、被称为“杖”等实物的人,与杖有所有者关系,这关系也是缘的因。同样地,他将说:“由于杖与人的关系,而有‘持杖者’这一缘”。即使对于行为之词义,也以差别者的身份而具有自义状态,这在生类词义等已说之处就应当说。因此,为了显示在“厨师”等词中,被称为行为与作者关系的、被他人认可的自义,他依他人的教导,在此关系自义已说之处,显示行为自义,而说“在某些情况下,行为也……”等。以名称的本质而被认知的、被称为名称的第五种义,被包含在事物词义中,因此“生类、功德、行为、事物”是四种名称义。名称也依语源义和惯用义而有两种,依男性、女性、中性之性而有三类,也成四种……如前所述,在四种义中,它使之倾向,或者它们使之倾向自身,以此原因(称为“名”)。也有人说,依共通性、功德、行为、意愿,名称另有四种分类。在那里,意愿名称也应知被包含在事物名称中。“这是女性”的意思是“这是已成就的”。以“然而”等,他证成已说之义,以“因此”等。以能表示、能照亮的作用,从以“i”结尾者,即从“牟尼”一词。否则,如果不是从以“i”结尾者,则不会发生“ato”的替换,由此显示了结果不会存在,这是关联。在注释中,“如是,少女、少女们”等,正如在阳性以“i”结尾者中,为了显示“si”等无替换的实例而说“如是”,同样在阴性中也显示非以“ā”结尾者。而这是“innū”等后缀结尾词的标志。以“若没有……则说”等,他显示了波你尼学派有建立语尾名称的其他经句。因为他们的经句是“vibhattica”(1-4-104),其意思是“si等和ti等具有语尾的名称”。“成为”即依语源义,成为语尾一词所言之物。那个(同样的义)被语尾一词所分别,故为“语尾”,这是业中加“ti”后缀的词,他显示“语尾”一词。然而,如何在这些“si”等之中,有“被分别”这一句义之随顺,而得以如此说呢?为了消除此疑,他显示其如何、以何方式被分别,而说“因为如此”等。显示巴利原文
Idāni sarūpādino visesanassa sakatthabhāvaṃ jātyādivisesassa dabbabhāvañca dassetuṃ ‘tatthā’tiādimāha, sarūpe vattate saddoti viyabhedopacārenāha-‘saddassa sarūpenā’ti, ettha pana goti jātimattavācini gosadde payutte gosaddo jātimattamāheti so jātiṃ viseseti nāma. Yaṭṭhiādisaddehi yaṭṭhiādisahacaritā upacārato gahitāti yaṭṭhiādidabbehi yaṭṭhiādisahacaritā purisā visesīyantīti āha-‘dabbampi dabbantarassa visesanabhūtambhavatī’ti, yaṭṭhiyopavesayāti yaṭṭhisaddavacanīya yaṭṭhidabbavisiṭṭhe purise pavesayāti attho, kuntepavesayāti etthāpi esevanayo, yathāvuttacatubbidhasakatthato paropi atthi sakatthoti āha-‘katthacī’tiādi, sambandhanimittoti sambandho nimittaṃ kāraṇaṃ paccayappavattiyā assa paccayassa soti samāso, ettha hi daṇḍo assa atthīti assāti sāmino purisassa saṃsaṅkhātadaṇḍādidabbena sahayo sassāmisambandho, sopi paccayassa nimittaṃ, tathā ca vakkhati-‘daṇḍapurisasambandhā daṇḍīti paccayo’ti, (kiri)yā padatthassāpi visesanattena sakatthabhāvo jātipadatthādīnaṃ vutta ṭhāneyeva vattabboti pācakoti ettha kiriyākārakasambandhasaṅkhātaṃ parābhimataṃ sakatthampi paropadesenopadisitukāmo idha sambandhasakatthassa vuttaṭṭhāneyeva kiriyāsakatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘katthaci kiriyāpī’tiādimāha. Nāmasabhāvena viññāyamānaṃ pañcamaṃ nāmasaṅkhātamatthaṃ dabbapadatthena saṅgahetvā jātiguṇakiriyādabbānīti hi catubbidho nāmattho, nāmampi anvattharuḷhivasena duvidhaṃ pumitthinapuṃsaka liṅgavasena tividhampi catubbidhaṃ hoti… yathāvutte catubbidhe atthe namati, te vā attani nāmetīti iminā kāraṇena. sāmaññaguṇa kiriyāyadicchāvasenāññathāpi catubbidhattaṃ nāmassa vadanti, tatthāpi yadicchānāmassa dabbanāmeneva saṅgaho veditabbo, itthattaṃ esāti pasiddhimā attho, yampanātiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ sādheti ‘tatthe’ccādinā, abhidhāyakattena jotakattena, ikārantatoti munisaddato, aññathāti ikārantato na bhavati ce, atoti ādesa bhavanato phalaṃ dassitaṃ na siyāti sambandho, vuttiyaṃ ‘evaṃ kumārī kumāriyo’tiādīsu evanti yathā pulliṅge ikārantato syādīnamudāharaṇamanādesatthaṃ vuttaṃ evamitthiyampi anākārantatoti dasseti, upalakkhaṇaṃ cetaminī-nī-ū-ti-paccayantādīnaṃ, asati…pe… vacaneti iminā pāṇiniyānaṃ vibhattisaññāvidhāyakassa suttantarassa atthibhāvaṃ dasseti, ‘‘vibhattica’’ (1-4-104) iti hi tesaṃ suttaṃ, tassattho ‘syādīnaṃ tyādīnañca vibhattisaññā hotī’ti, bhavantīti anvatthavasena vibhattisaddavacanīyāni bhavanti, so (yevattho) vibhatticcanena vibhajīyatīti vibhatti, kamme ktippaccayantoyaṃ vibhatti saddoti dasseti, kathampanetesu syādīsu vibhajīyaticcassa vākyatthāssānugamo yenevaṃ vuccaticcāsaṅkiya yena yathā ca vibhajīyati tamupadassento āha-‘tathā hi’ccādi.
注疏中,“作者之行为”(kattukiriyā)即指两种行为:与作者相关的行为,以及与作者之境相关的行为。由于词根有多义性,此处“他做”(karoti)有“关联”之义,因而说“被做(karīyati),即被紧密关联”,意思是:任何词义之形被关联。由此显示,此“业”的惯用称呼是依其语源义成立的。然而,即便一切作格都与行为有所关联,也唯有那个欲被言说、正以被行为紧密关联的方式而存在着,方应知为“业”。作者等即使被作者的行为所紧密关联,若没有想说其为作者等的意愿,也不成为“业”……因为正是依于想说的意愿,才有诸作格。同样地,一切作格在获得其他作格性时,其原本作格性的不存在,应如理而说。以“以句之一分”等语,他暗示“dvedvekā”等句与“于业为第二格”等句是同一句。由于论典具有大句的性质,即使相隔遥远的句子,也因期待等状态,通过相互关联的感受而进入同一句的状态。注疏中说:显示巴利原文
Vuttiyaṃ kattukiriyāyāti kattusādyatāya taṃ sambandhiniyā kattukammaṭṭhāyapi duvidhāya kiriyāya, anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ karoti ettha sambandhanatthoti āha-‘karīyati abhisambandhīyatī’ti, yaṃkiñci padattharūpaṃ sambajjhatīti attho, iminā cānvatthavasenevāyaṃ kammavohāro siddhoti dasseti, sabbakārakānampi pana kiriyāsambandha sabbhāvepi kiriyābhisambandhīyamānatteneva yaṃ vattumicchitaṃ tadeva kammaṃ viññeyyaṃ, kattādi kattu kiriyāyābhisambandhīyamānattepi kattādittavacanicchāyeva kammaṃ na hoti… yasmā vacanicchāyeva kārakāni bhavanti, evaṃ sabbakārakānampi kārakantarappattiyaṃ tadabhāvo yathāyogaṃ vattabbo, vākyekadesenetyanena ‘‘dvedvekā’’dino vākyassa ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’iccādino ca ekavākyattaṃ sūceti, pakaraṇassa mahāvākyarūpattā vippakaṭṭhānipi vākyāni ākaṅkhādisabhāve aññamaññasambandhānubhavanenekavākyabhāvampaṭīpajjante, vuttī hi–
期待、适宜、邻近,因有种子之存续,
诸句虽相隔遥远,亦成大句。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ākaṅkhāyoggatā sattā, bījaṃ sannidhino yato; Vippakaṭṭhāni vākyāni, mahāvākyaṃ karontyatoti.
所谓“共通地”,指不区分业等差别,依循前代师长的共许名称,故说“第二转等”。因此,虽然“ti”等也可依填充之需称为“第二转”,但依惯用法,“si”等组的第二转、第三转等,是以“第二”等词来把握“ti”等诸组的。所谓“在被特殊化的(对象上)”,即被业等所特殊化的对象。他说业有三种,这是依自宗通许而说业有三种;但其他人则认许有七种。如何说的呢?显示巴利原文
Sāmaññenāti kammādyavisesena, pubbācariyasamaññāvasenāha ‘dutiyādikā’ti, tena yadyapi tyādinopi dvinnaṃ pūraṇiyā dutiyāti sakkā voharituṃ, tathāpi syādīnaṃ dukeyeva dutiyātatiyā ruḷhīti natyādīnaṃ dukāni dutiyādisaddena gayhanti, visiṭṭhesūti kammādinā visesitesu, tividhaṃ kammanti sakasamayappasiddhiyā kammassa tividhattamāha, aññe tu sattavidhamicchanti, kathaṃ–
其中,最可意的业, 及另一类业,有四种;
可意与不可意,以及非可意非不可意,
同样,有先于其他与不先于其他者,如是,另一种(业)有四种。
显示巴利原文 Nibbattivikatippatti, bhedena tividhaṃ mataṃ, Tatthecchitatamaṃ kammaṃ, kammaṃtvaññaṃ catubbidhaṃ; Icchitañcānicchitañca, nevicchitamanicchitaṃ, Tathāññapubbaṃ nāññapubbanti, evamaññaṃ catubbidhanti.
其中,可意等(业)稍后将出现。以“其中”等,他从自性上开示三种业。此处,有人以种种方式分别“令生业”,我们今将在此阐明——显示巴利原文
Tattha icchitādīni upariyevāpi bhavissanti, tatreccādinā tividhaṃ kammaṃ sarūpato dasseti, tattha nibbattikammameke-nekadhā parikappenti, tadiha pakāsayissāma–
Satī-satī vā pakati, na yattha pariṇāminī, Nissīyate taṃ nibbatti, kammamaññesamaññathā; Asantaṃ jāyate yaṃ vā, yaṃ santamappakāsati, Uppatyā-bhibyattiyā vā, tannibbattīti vuccatīti.
此处之义为:所谓‘所作变异’这一存在之本性,即是能变易者;当其变易而趋向所作变异时,于彼作用中并无所依……‘作所作’一辞,此处唯是为了表述单纯的意义,因为‘作’字并未被听见;然而,若本性被听见,则成为可变者。因此,‘于所作中作所作,于米中煮饭’兼具二义:作与煮。所以,‘于所作中作,于米中煮’是变异;‘作所作,煮饭’是生起。这便是其中的含义。或者,若没有本性,由于不存在,于彼即无所依……能令合生起,能令离生起,因为任何本性对于合与离皆无变异,所以具有合与离者,实是从无变异者而生起彼。如是,有一种主张:无依本性、无存在本性的业,名为生起业,此是一种;其他业则与此相异。如此说后,又开示‘非存在’等:凡是令非存在、不存在者生起的,即是生起业,如‘令乐生起,令智生起’;或是令存在、已存在而唯先前未曾显现者,由生起或由显现而令其显现,此亦是生起业,如‘生子,令共相显现’。如此,依某些人的见解,无依本性与无存在本性是两种生起业;依其他论师所许,非存在而生起、存在而显现,也是两种生起业。凡此种种,都不过是先前未存在而生起,所以‘从无而生起’与这并无差异,因此说‘应按从无而生起理解’。另一显示巴利原文
Ayamettha attho ‘‘kaṭavikārassa kāsasaṅkhātā vijjamānā pakati pariṇāminī kaṭavikārampati pariṇamantī yatthappayoge na nissīyate… kaṭaṃ karotītettha kevalamatthāvagamamattassa vattumicchitattā kāseti asuyyamānattā ca, pakatiyā tu suyya mānatte vikāriyaṃ siyā, teneva kāse kaṭaṃ karoti, taṇḍule odanaṃ pacatīti dvayattho karoti pacati ca, tasmā kāse karoti taṇḍule pacatīti vikārīyati, kaṭaṃ karoti odanampacatīti nibbattī yatīti attho, asatī vā pakati avijjamānattāyeva yattha na nissīyate… ( ) saṃyogaṃ janayati vibhāgamuppādayatīti saṃyogavibhāgānaṃ kassāpi pakatiyā avikārattā saṃyogavibhāgavante hyavikateheva tesaṃ jananato, tamevambhūtamanissitapakatikaṃ avijjamāna (pakati) kaṃ vā kāriyaṃ nibbattikammaṃ nāmāti eko, aññesamaññathāti vatvā tandasseti ‘asanta’miccādinā, yaṃ asantamavijjamānaṃ jāyate, tannibbattikammaṃ, yathā sukhaṃ janayati buddhimuppādayatīti, santaṃ vijjamānameva vā kevalamappakāsitapubbaṃ yaṃ uppattiyā abhibyattiyā vā pakāsati, tampi nibbattikammaṃ, yathā puttaṃ vijāyatisāmaññamabhibyañjayatī’’ti, tadevaṃ kesañci matena anissitapakatikaṃ avijjamānapakatikanti duvidhaṃ nibbattikammampi aññesammatena asantaṃ jāyamānaṃ santamappakāsamānanti duvidhaṃ nibbattikammampītisabbampi aṭṭhitapubbameva jāyatītyasato jānanā na byatiriccaticcāha-‘asato jananaṃ karīyatī’ti, avatthantaranti odanādino kledanādilakkhaṇamaññamavatthaṃ.
由本性断灭而生起者,是某种某种之变异;
由其他性质之生起,如是,此变异有二种。
显示巴利原文 Pakatyucchedasambhūtaṃ, vikāriyaṃ kiñci kiñci tu; Guṇantarasamuppatyā, evaṃ sā vikati dvidhā.
某些变异业,由断除本性之因而生起,譬如“令木成灰”,即木的彻底转变;某些则由其他性质之生起,譬如“令金成手镯或臂环”。如是,变异有二种,这是它的义。凡不能了知者,即不能通达;所谓“得”,即是“令其得、令其成为所缘境”的意思。显示巴利原文
Kiñci vikāriyaṃ kammaṃ pakatiyā kāraṇassa ucchedena sambhūtaṃ, yathā kaṭṭhaṃ bhasmaṃ karotīti kaṭṭhassāccantaparāvatti , kiñci pana guṇantarānamuppattiyā, yathā suvaṇṇaṃ kaṭakaṃ keyuraṃ vā karotīti evaṃ dvīdhā sā vikati hotīti attho, na vibhāvīyanteti na gamyante, sā patti‘pāpīyati visayīkarīyatī’ti katvā.
若于某处,由造作所生的任何差别,皆不可了知;
由现见或推论所得,彼即名为“得”。
显示巴利原文 Yatra kriyākato koci, viseso nāvagamyate; Dassanā vānumānā vā, sā pattīti pakittitā.
若于某处,由行为所造、行为所成就的差别与殊胜,无论是依现见——即以现量,还是依推论——即以比量,皆不可了知、不可获得,如同生起与变异的殊胜可由现量与比量了知。在此,生起中差别的成就极为显著……然而被称为“得利”的差别并不存在,因为是由行为所造故;于变异中,或属现量所行境……如“烧木”,因黑色等状态可直接由现量获得;或属推论所行境……如“令提婆达多怒,或令其净信”,因怒等可由面容异样等果相而推知。如此,若某处没有差别成就,唯是“得”,彼即称为“得”,已说。“见太阳,思惟法”——即是此处之义。问:既然“得”业并不存在,无所造作,如何有作者性?实无任何无所造作者堪称作者。答:显示巴利原文
Yattha kiriyākato kiriyāsampādito viseso atisayo koci nāvagamyate nappatīyate dassanā vā paccakkhappamāṇena anumānappamāṇena vā yathā nibbattivikatīnamatisayo paccakkhānumānā vagamanīyo, tatra hi nibbattiyaṃ visesasiddhiratipasiddhā… atthalābhākhyassa visesassāvijjamānassa kiriyākattā, vikāriye ( ) tu kvaci paccakkhavisayo… kaṭṭhaṃ ḍahatīti kaṇhattādibhāvassa paccakkhenevopalabbhanato, kvacidanumānagammo… devadattaṃ roseti pasādayati veti visiṭṭhamukhavaṇṇādikāriyānumeyyattā rosādino, evaṃ yattha na visesasiddhi api tu pattimattaṃ, sā pattīti pakittitā kathitā, ādiccampassati dhammamajjhetīti ayamettha attho, kathañcarahi asantassa pattikammassa kiñci (akaronta)ssa kārakattaṃ, na hi kiñci akarontaṃ kārakambhavitumarahatīti uccate-
堪能现见的似现、前显与显明等;
种种差别,是于获得行为之成办中所期许的。
显示巴利原文 Dassanakkhamatābhāso, pagamabyattiādayo; Visesā pattikammassa, kriyāsiddhiyamicchitā.
于此处,“能够被看见”即是堪能于见,趋近显现,趋近境域,以及明了等,这些差别如其所应,是于获得行为之行为成办中被期许的。由此,它是该行为的作者——这是含义。因为在“见太阳”这一例中,太阳能够被看见,它在那里被看见,并达到明了,所以通过成就见的行为这一义,其作者性得以成立。同样,于他处亦应通过“ādi”等词所摄的差别,从行为成办来理解作者性。难道变化物不也是产生业吗?……因为它以那种形式,使原本不存在者生起。而获得行为,也以与行为相关联的形式,使原本不存在者后来转成那样,故它确实是产生。这是真实的。显示巴利原文
Atra daṭṭhuṃ sakkā iti dassane khamatā ābhāsopagamo visayattopagamo visayattopagamanaṃ byatti ceti evamādayo visesā yathāyogaṃ pattikammassa kiriyānipphattiyaṃ icchitā, tato tassa kārakattanti attho, ādiccaṃ passatīti ettha hi ādicco daṭṭhuṃ sakkā, tatova so dissati abhibyattiñcopayātīti dassanakiriyānipphādakatthenāssa kārakattamupapajjate, tathā ññatrāpyādisaddagahitavisesavasena kiriyāsiddhito kārakattaṃ veditabbaṃ , nanu vikāriyampi nibbattikammameva… tena rūpenāsatoyeva jananato, pattikammampi kiriyāsambandharūpenāsantameva pacchā tathā bhavatīti nibbattiyevāti saccaṃ-
其中,凡此‘适合’之义,如‘patī’之音,乃是从声义回转的角度而言。
显示巴利原文 Atthesā vatthuṭṭhiti, sukhumabuddhigocarapatītyanurodhena, Tatra yampetaṃ ghaṭate, yathā patīti saddatthāvattānato.
由于未做区分,故以通名‘于业为第二格’而说。在‘kaṭo karīyati, kato kaṭo’等例中,因为以‘tyādi’为首者,即使在已说出的业等所依上,对于单数等,第二格等也会出现,因无决定故。正如在五派中,名称义是‘kaṭa’等所表之关联的业等义;而以‘tyādi’为首者,乃为表达未说之数、名等其他格义,故即使在已说出的‘kaṭa’等业等上,第二格等也可能存在。因此,波你尼语法家在‘kamme dutiyā’等(2-3-2)中,加立了‘anabhihite’(2-3-1)之语。即使没有第二格等的过失,仅仅为了表达,在其所依的作者等义上,于已说者中,第二格等也可能存在。然而在三派中,数、业等是格所表达的内容。其中,业等虽由词缀表显,单数等却未被表显,因此为了表达那数、名等其他格义,即使在已说出的业等上,第二格等也可能存在。因此,波你尼语法家在‘kamme dutiyā’中加立了‘anabhihite’之语。为显明此义,他说:‘tatridaṃ siyā’等。显示巴利原文
Visesānupādānatoti ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ti sāmaññena vuttattā vuttaṃ. Karīyati kaṭo, kato kaṭo ccevamādīsu tyādippabhutīhi atihitakammādinissayesupi ekattādīsu dutiyādayo papponti niyamābhāvā, tathāhi pañcake nāmatthe kaṭādivacanīyassa sambandhī kammādyattho, tyādippabhutīti anabhi hitassa saṅkhyākhyassāparassa vibhatyatthassābhidhānāya abhihitesupi kaṭādīsu kammādīsu dutiyādayo siyunti pāṇiniyā ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ccādīsu (2-3-2) ‘‘anabhihite’’ti (2-3-1) vacanamadhikaronti, veyyattiyāyeva dutiyādīnappasaṅgepi tannissayabhūte-kattādyatthe jotanāyābhihitesu dutiyādayo siyuṃ, tike pana saṅkhyākammādayo vibhatti vacanīyā, tattha yajjapi kammādino paccayenābhidhānaṃ, tathāpyekattādayo nābhihitāti tassa saṅkhyākhyassāparassa vibhatyatthassāti dhānāya abhihitesupi kammādīsu dutiyādayo siyunti pāṇiniyā ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ti ‘‘anabhihite’’ti vacanamadhikaronti, tamupadassento āha-‘tatridaṃ siyā’tiādi, tatra tasmiṃ dutiyādi vibhattividhāne idaṃ codyaṃ siyā, kinti āha-‘pañcake’iccādi, anabhihitakammādinissayesuti anabhihitā kammādayo nissayā yesamekattādīnaṃ, tesūtyattho, dutiyādayo vibhattiyo yathā siyunti jotanāyābhidhānāya cāti yujjamānavasena attho veditabbo, abhihitakammādinissayesupīti apisaddena anabhihitakammādinissayamekattādiṃ samuccinoti, āsaṅkiyāti pubbakiriyāya vuttanti aparakiriyā veditabbā, pañcake tike cā bhihitakammādinissaye sekattādīsu dutiyādippattimāsaṅkāvasena dassetvā catukkavādīnampi pakkhamubbhāviya pariharituṃ ‘yadiccā’dimāha, ayantesamadhippāyo ‘‘yadesā saṅkhyā pāṭipadikattho tappaṭipajjane kammādayo vibhattivacanīyā, tadā ‘anabhihite kamme’tiādinā anabhihitaggahaṇaṃ kammādivisesānamanubhavantamanatthakaṃ… abhihite vibhattivāccābhāvato, yadā panāyaṃ pakkho ‘saṅkhyā vibhattivacanīyā’ti tadā ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ tyevamādayo niddesā visayasandassanamattāyeva veditabbā’’ti, sabbathāti pañcakatikavādīnaṃ catukkavādīnañca matavasena sabbappakārena, saddatthābyatirittatthamattoyevāti byatireko byatirittaṃ, napuṃsake bhāve kto, na vijjate byatirittaṃ byatireko bhedo yassa taṃ abyatirittaṃ, abyatibhinnanti attho, saddatthato sakatthato abyatirittaṃ atthamattaṃ atthasāmaññaṃ yassa odanādisaddassa so tathā vutto.
虽然在注疏中,以“tabbādi”等复合词说示了未说者,但即便如此,在它们已说示的情况下,也应如此看待。为举例说明,他说:“evaṃ”等。在“kara-karaṇe karīyitthāti kato”中,“kato”是依“kto bhāvakammesu”(5-56)于业上的“kto”。“satiko”中的“kīto”是依“dissantaññepi paccayā”(4-120)于业义上的“iko”。业性被理解,因为“kita”等词缀是于业上制定的。而且,为什么导师只给了一个例子?因此他说:“udāharaṇa”等。即使没有“anabhihite”之语,“api”字表决定,即“vinā eva”;或表可能。意思是:如果在已说示者中,即使没有该语,第二格等也不出现,那么在有该语的情况下,就根本无需讨论了。然而,在此应知,在已说示者中,第二格等并无出现之过。因为“paccate odano, kato kaṭo”等中,如果第二格等出现,第一格的规定就没有余地了。因此,依其力量,只有在未说示的业等上,第二格等才会通过自己行为的显明而存在;而在已说示者上,则是第一格。难道第一格没有非作者之余地吗?如“rukkho pilakkho”——这为何被称为非作者?如果它是作者,则此用法不合适。因此,在听不到特殊行为之处,通过伴随句义的存有与获得,期待“rukkho atthi, pilakkho atthi”,所以树等的作者性就在义中。而“uccaṃ nīcaṃ”是不变词,表方所,与“atthi”无关,因此“uccam atthi”等中,作者性属于所依者,而非所依。所以,所依没有作者性,第一格有余地。因此,“第一格的规定将无余地”这一所说的理由,是不成立的——可以这样说。然而,不说“从无数为第一格”,而依“paṭhamā attha matte”(2.39)的通规,它本来就是成立的。因此,所谓“anabhihita”之语无意义,这一理由便得以确立。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi vuttiyaṃ tabbādiṇādisamāsehi abhihitamavuttaṃ, tathāpi tehi abhihitepyevameva daṭṭhabbanti nidassento āha-‘eva’miccādi, kara-karaṇe karīyitthāti kato‘kto bhāvakammesu’ti (5-56) kamme kto, satikoti ettha kītoti kammatthe ‘‘dissantaññepi paccayā’’ti (4-120) iko, kammatāgamyate kitappaccayādīnaṃ kamme vihitattā, evañca dhuhi kimekamudāharaṇaṃ dattamācariyene tyato āha- ‘udāharaṇa’iccādi, anabhihiteti vacanaṃ vināpīti vacanaṃ vinā evāti avadhāraṇe-apisaddo, sambhāvanevā, yadyabhihitehi vacanaṃ vināpi dutiyādīnamappavatti bhaveyya, vacanasabbhāve tu kathāyeva natthīti attho, evañca panettha dutiyādīnamabhihite pasaṅgābhāvo jānitabbo ‘‘paccate odano, kato kaṭoccādopi yadi dutiyādayo siyuṃ paṭhamāvidhānassāvakāso na bhaveyya tato sāmatthiyānabhihiteyeva kammādo dutiyādayo sakiriyā (yaṃ tada)bhibyattiyā bhavissanti, paṭhamevatvabhihite’’ti, na nuca paṭhamāyākārakamavakāso rukkho pilakkhoti kimidamuccate akārakanti yadya kārakaṃ nedampayogamarahati tato yattha visesakiriyāna massavanaṃ tattha padatthasahacaritāya sattāya patītiyā ‘rukkho atthi pilakkho atthī’ti apekkhīyatīti kārakattaṃ rukkhādīna mattheveti , na ca uccaṃ nīcaṃtyadhikaraṇavācitte nipātassa atthītyanena natthi sambandhoti uccamatthītyādheyyasseva kattuttaṃ nādhārassātya kārakattamādhārassātyavakāso-tthi paṭhamāyāti ‘‘paṭhamāvidhā nassāvakāso na bhaveyyā’’ti yathāvutto-yaṃ hetu asiddhoti ca sakkā vattuṃ, asaṅkhyato paṭhamātyavatvā ‘‘paṭhamāttha matte’’ti (2.39) sāmaññavidhānato siddhoyeva, yaṃ hetuttānabhihitavacanamanatthakamicceva ṭhitaṃ.
“Yañca”中的ca(和、亦)词,表示所说内容的补充,意为“还有其他要说的”。其关联为“yañca phalaṃ maññate”(并且他认为果报……)。若此处没有说明的规则,那时就像“kato kaṭo”(已作被作)中,由于业(kamma)已被说明,所以不生起第二格(受格);同样地,在“kaṭaṃ karoti vipulaṃ dassanīyaṃ”(作已作,作广大,作可观)中,由kaṭa一词产生的第二格,由于(vipula等处的)业已被说明,所以对vipula等修饰语不应有第二格。因此,在tyādi等词及tabbādi等复合词中,由于业已被说明,对vipula等也不应设立第二格,这被称为“未说明”。在“未说明”一词的规则下,其义为“并且他思惟果报”,此关联是合宜的。“paccekaṃ karotyabhisambandhatāyā”意为:如“作已作,作广大,作可观”这般,一一分别造作而相关联,余下“有业性(kammatā atthīti)”之意。如此,他这样认为:“我作已作”生起,且“我作广大,我作可观”也生起,即vipula等也一一各有业性。其中,若宣说了一个,另一个便随顺观察,因此即使为了该词的表显,也会有第二格。其他派别的引入,不应轻视阿阇梨(的教法),我们也将在此展示:“由kaṭa一词生起的第二格,说明业是kaṭa类,而非vipula等德性之业;因此,仅由该词的表显而有第二格。或者,kaṭa本身即是业,它以共同依处与vipula等也有第二格。因为当说‘作已作,作广大,作可观’时,vipula等由于与作者有共同依处而被认知。因此,由说明kaṭa一词共同依处者,此处应立第二格。”难道这不是指责吗?“evaṃ”(如是)——如是具德者若有业性,便得成就。即在业未被说明的“kaṭa”(已作)中,由kta后缀故,与udāra等词相关联而得第二格,此为其义。“evaṃ maññate”等是反驳。“不以分支说业”是其关联。“以分支”即分别、各自。“为何不呢?”他说:“从自性而言,说一切为业。”随它去!即使由udāra等所述规则有第一格,由kaṭa一词有何生起?他说:“由kaṭa一词亦……”等。“antobhūto”(内在包含)即该词之义内在于其中,在此业相之义中,此业相之义被说明、宣说、成就、生起。难道“kato kaṭo”等,从自性而言,在一切业的运用和名词内在意义的运用中,不是处处仅有第一格吗?因此在“kaṭaṃ karoti uḷāraṃ sobhanaṃ dassanīyaṃ”中,由kaṭa等词产生的第二格,由于业已被说明,对uḷāra等便会有第一格之过失。怀着对“已说明与说明之过失”的指责,他说:“kaṭādisaddo tv”等。“sāmaññena”即分别依kaṭa等的共通性。显示巴利原文
Yañcāti casaddo vattabbantarasamuccaye aparampi kiñci vattabbamatthīti attho, yañca phalaṃ maññateti sambandho, yadetthāna bhihitādhikāro natthi tadā yathā ‘kato kaṭo’ccatrattena kammassābhihitattā dutiyā na hoti tathā ‘kaṭaṃ karoti vipulaṃ dassanīya’nti kaṭasaddato uppannāya dutiyāya (vipulādigatassa) kammassā bhihitattā vipulādīhi visesanehi dutiyā na siyā, tato tyādi tabbādiṇādisamāsehi kammassāna bhihitattamattevāti vipulādīhipi dutiyāvidhānasaṅkhātaṃ anabhihite’’ti (2-3-1) anabhihita vacanassa adhikāre yañca phalaṃ cintayatīti attho, yuttassātimassa attho sambandhassāti, paccekaṃ karotyabhisambandhatāyāti ‘kaṭaṃ karoti vipulaṃ karoti dassanīyaṃ karoti’ccevaṃ paccekaṃ paccekaṃ karotissābhisambandhatāyāti attho, kammatā atthīti seso, evaṃ maññate-‘‘kaṭaṃ karomīti pavatto vipulaṃ karomī dassaniyaṃ karomīti ca pavattovāti vipulādīnampi paccekaṃ kammatā attheva, tatthekassābhidhāne parekassa sukhamavalokayantīti tadabhidhānāyapi dutiyā bhavissatī’’ti, pakārantarāvatāro nācariye noparodhitoti tampi panettha dassayissāma-‘‘kaṭasaddā uppajjamānā dutiyā kaṭajāti kammamabhihitavatī, na vipulādiguṇakammaṃ, tato tadabhidhānāya ca dutiyāyeva bhavati, athavā kaṭova kammaṃ, taṃ sāmānādhikaraṇyena vipulādīhipi dutiyā bhavissati, kaṭaṃ karoti vipulo dassanīyoti hi vuccamāne vipulādayo kattusamānādhikaraṇatāyeva patīyeyyuṃ tasmā kaṭasaddasāmānādhikaraṇyampaṭipādayatā vassamettha dutiyā karaṇīyā’’ti. Nanvemiccādicodyaṃ, evanti evaṃ guṇayuttassa kammatāya sati, pappotīti kaṭa kamme-bhidhāniye (kato) ti ktappaccayassa katattā udārādito karotyabhisambandhā dutiyā pappotīti attho, evaṃ maññateccādi parihāro, avayavena kammaṃ na vadatīti sambandho, avayavenāti visuṃvisuṃ, kiñcarahīti āha-‘sabhāvato sabbaṃ kammaṃ vadatī’ti. Hotu kāmaṃ udārāditopi vuttena vidhinā paṭhamā, katasaddato kā pavattatīti āha-‘katasaddato pi’ccādi, antobhūto antogadho nāmassa saddassa attho yasmiṃ kammalakkhaṇattheso attho kammalakkhaṇo abhihito kathito sampanno sampajjatīti attho, nanu ‘kato kaṭo’ccādo sabhāvato sabbakammavuttiyā antobhūtanāmatthavuttiyā cātthamatte hoti sabbattha paṭhamāti ‘kaṭaṃ karoti uḷāraṃ sobhanaṃ dassanīya’nti kaṭāditopi uppannāya dutiyāya kammassābhihitattā uḷārādīhi paṭhamāppasaṅgo siyāti abhihitābhidhānappasaṅgopagataṃ codanaṃ manasi nidhāyāha-‘kaṭādisaddo tvi’ccādi, sāmaññenāti visuṃ visuṃ kaṭādisāmaññena.
根据“kattur icchitatamaṃ”(作者最欲求的对象)这条规则(波你尼1-4-49),在与作者动作相关的最欲求者上,施设业名,波你尼派在nibbati等各类业中规定第二格。而该欲求本身,因为是动作的目的,就如“煮饭”、“挤牛奶”等,煮等动作旨在饭等,故饭等即是欲求本身。为显示此,他说:“yaṃ kattu”等。其关联是:设立语尾,即被认可为第二格。再者,作为牛奶等结果之缘,任何挤奶等动作若未以作具等形式被说明,而牛等是欲求之工具,此时也依“akathitañca”(及未说明者,1-4-51)设立业名,由此规定第二格。为显示此,他说:“upayujjamāne”等。对此,Vārttikakāra(注疏作者)作了未说明的规定:显示巴利原文
‘‘Katturicchitatama’’ntyanena (1-4-49) kattuno kiriyāya sambandhi tumiṭṭhatamaṃ tasmiṃ icchitatame kammasaññaṃ vidhāya nibbatyādikesutīsu kammesu dutiyā vidhīyate pāṇinīyehi, icchitatamattañca tadatthattā kiriyāya, odanaṃ pacati gāvumpayo dohatityādo(hi) odanādyatthā pacanādikiriyārabbhateti odanapayādīnamicchitatamattaṃ, tadupadassento āha-‘yaṃ kattu’ccādi, vibhattiṃ vidhāya dutiyābhimatāti sambandho, puna payādinipphattinimittaṃ yaṃkiñci dohanādikiriyā yuttaṃ karaṇādirūpena akathitaṃ gavādikamicchitaṃ kārakaṃ, tatthāpi ‘‘akathitañcā’’ti (1-4-51) kammasaññaṃ vidhāya teneva dutiyā vidhīyate, tadupadassetumāha-‘upayujjamāne’ccādi, atra cevamakathitaniyamo kato vāttikakārena-
Pucchicibhikkhīnaṃ duhi,yācīnaṃ nimittamupayoge; Pubbavidhimhi-kathitaṃ, brūsāsīnañca guṇāsattanti.
upayujjate 是指“被使用”,为成就所愿之义而发挥作用,故称为 upayoga(作用)——从 payo 等词开始。其中,nimitta(相)指牛等。在“前规”中,若尚未安立 apādāna(夺格)等“前”名,一旦安立,便有如“童子问路”、“从树摘果”等随宜之说。“guṇāsatta”指由功德所系之有情。此处以“guṇa”(功德)一词,意在说明主要助缘等。主要助缘,即对动作的资助;依资助动作的主要性而有功德。“ca”(及)是表随属的合集。主要性即法等的生起,因其为彼之意义。upayujjamānañca taṃ payoppabhuti(被使用者且从 payo 等开始者)作限定复合词,upayujjamāna-payoppabhutino nimittanti(被使用、从 payo 等开始者的相)为第六格复合词。以 pabhuti 一词取牛等,以 ādi 词取 gomanta(有牛)等,以第二格 ādi 词取 adhikaraṇa(依处)等,以第四格取 vinaya(律)等。vidhānaṃ 即第二格的安立,当知“以第二格安立为所许”。显示巴利原文
Upayujjate iṭṭhatthasiddhiyaṃ byāpārīyatītyupayogo-payoppabhuti, tasmiṃ, nimittaṃ gavādi, apubbavidhimhi apādānādhikaraṇādi pubbasaññā vidhānābhāve, vidhāne hi māṇavakā maggaṃ pucchati, rukkhā phalānyavacinātyādi yathārahaṃ bhavati, guṇāsattanti guṇena sattaṃ sambandhī, guṇasaddenettha padhānasādhanaṃ dhammādikaṃ vattumicchitaṃ padhānasādhanañhi kiriyāyopakārakamupakāriyaṃ padhānabhūtaṃ kiriyamapekkhiya guṇo bhavati, co-nuttasamuccaye, padhānantu dhammādino pavattiyā tadatthattā, upayujjamānañca taṃ payopabhuticeti visesanasamāsaṃ katvā upayujjamānapayoppabhutino nimittanti chaṭṭhīsamāso, pabhuti saddena gavādino gahaṇaṃ, ādisaddena gomantādino, dutiyenādi saddena adhikaraṇādino, catutthena vinayādino, vidhānanti dutiyā vidhānaṃ, dutiyāvidhānamabhimatanti yojanīyaṃ. Pāṇiniyehi ‘‘tathā yuttañcānicchitaṃ’’ (1-4-50) iccanena kammasaññaṃ vidhāya ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ (2-3-2) tyaneneva dutiyā vidhīyate, tandassetumāha-‘yene’ccādi, ‘‘tathā yuttañcānicchita’’ntīmassa attho yeneveccādipañcikāpāṭhānusārena veditabbo, yujjateti kiriyābhisambajjhate, yuttanti kiriyābhisambandhaṃ, atra tu–
若由无知等而违越,此时初始即非所欲;
若出于惭、畏等,此即被视为极度的欲求;
显示巴利原文 Yadyabuddhyāhilaṅghādi, tadāhyādimanicchitaṃ; Yadā lajjābhayādīhi, tadecchi tatamaṃ mataṃ.
依据“tathā yuttañ cānicchitaṃ”(如是相应及非所欲)的经文,这是通过排除的方式来表述的:icchitā 指“所欲”;anicchitaṃ 则指其余不被认可者。由此,在“前往村庄时,靠近树根”这一句中,树根既非所特意求取,亦非所违逆不欲,业的安立依然得以成立。因此,此处依据“于业立第二格”的规则,确立第二格。为说明此义,论中说“nevicchitā nānicchitassā”等。因前往村庄是首要目的,靠近树根便属于顺带发生,故树根既非所欲——前者并非为它而行,亦非非所欲——因其并不相违。是故,树根与动作之间的关联确实存在。在此亦——显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathā yuttañcānicchita’’nti suttenassa pariyudāsavuttito icchitā aññamanicchitamanabhimatamitarañca, tatoyeva‘gāmaṃ gacchanto rukkhamūlamupasappatī’tyatra nevicchitanānicchitassapi rukkhamūlassa kamma saññā siddhāti tattha ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ti dutiyā vidhīyate, tandasseti’nevicchitanānicchitasmā’iccādi, rukkhamūlaṃ nevicchitaṃ pubbamanabhimatattā, nāpyanicchitaṃ appaṭikūlattā, gāmagamena hyassa tapparatā, rukkhamūlopasappanantu pasaṅgāgatanti rukkhamūlānampi kiriyābhisambandho attheva, atrāpi-
非所欲亦非非所欲,于无意趋近之际;
然而,这种为休息而设的根本,应是最可意的。
显示巴利原文 Nevicchitānicchitantu, mabuddhiyupasappane; Mūlaṃ vissamanatthantu, tamicchitatamaṃ siyā.
为显明‘brūsāsinañca’中‘ca’字所含之义,而说‘eva’等。此处,‘gāma, devadatta, gaggā’是所述之称谓,‘ajā’等是最可意的。以‘ādi’一词,包含了‘pattheti gāvuṃ purisaṃ dvijo’等。‘nayati’的‘nī’是到达之义,‘vahati’的‘vaha’是到达之义,‘harati’的‘hara’是带走之义,‘jayati’的‘ji’是胜利之义。在一切处,加上‘e’和‘aya’的语尾变化后,而成词形。‘daṇḍa’是惩罚/杖之义,属‘curādi’类,在‘ṇi’语尾时成为词形。继而,依‘adhisīṭṭhāsānaṃ kammaṃ’等(1-4-46),以各各业名分别规定后,于‘paṭhaviṃ adhisessati’等处,依‘kamme dutiyā’(2-3-2)而规定第二格。在在处处,此处皆为世间对业之语欲。如是,为显明此依不同名称而有的业,而说‘adhipubba’等。以何种语欲而有第二格,复以彼语欲如何而有业性?此是其中的关联。显示巴利原文
Brūsāsinañcāti casaddopasaṅgahite dassetumāha-‘eva’miccādi, ettha gāmadevadattagaggānamakathitasaññā, ajādayo tvicchitatamā, ādisaddena ‘pattheti gāvuṃ purisaṃ dvijo’tyādayo saṅgahitā, nayatinī=pāpuṇane, vahati vaha=pāpuṇane, harati hara=haraṇe, jayatiji=jaye, sabbatthaleca ette ayādese ca rūpaṃ, daṇḍa=daṇḍane curādittā ṇimhi rūpaṃ, atha ‘‘adhisīṭṭhāsānaṃ kammaṃ’’tyādinā (1-4-46) tena tena kammasaññaṃ vidhāya ‘paṭhaviṃ adhisessatī’ti ādo (tattha) tattha ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ti (2-3-2) dutiyā vidhīyate tehi tehi sattha kārehi, sabbatthevettha lokassa kammavacanicchāti kamenetaṃññasaññāpubbakaṃ kammamupadassento āha-‘adhipubba’iccādi, yāya vatticchāya dutiyā siyā tāya vatticchāya kammatā kathaṃhināmāti sambandho, neva upalabbhantīti kadācikassaci siyāti sambandho, payatitabbanti suttantaramārabbhanīyaṃ, tatthevaṃ kiṃ bhavato manasi dosadhijambhanenāti attho, dhammeti etthāpi evaṃ saddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo, yathā ādhāre kammavacanicchā, tathehāpi ādhāravacanicchāti attho, tenevāha-‘dhammeti ādhāravacanicchā’ti, dhamme abhinivisateti sambandho, evaṃsaddasamānatthattā tathā saddassa tadatthānusāreneva viññāyatīti tathāsaddassa attho visuṃ na vutto, pānañca ācāroca pānācāraṃ, taṃpānācāramassa ādhārassa tasmiṃ tappānācāre, pānatthācāratthadhātusambandhī yo nadyādi ko ādhāro so pānācāravāyevāti āha- ‘pānatthācāratthānaṃ dhātūnamādhāre’ti , kesañcīti aniyamena kesañci saddasatthakārānaṃ, etthāti etasmiṃ ādhāravacanicchāpakkhe, patiparīhi bhāgecetyavasiddhāti iminā patisaddassa dhātunā ayuttataṃ dasseti… yadi yujjeyya chaṭṭhiyābhāvā, tenāha-‘yadātvi’ccādi, vuttiyaṃ tenāti tasaddena, apisaddopasaṅgahitaṃ tatiyampi gahetvā vācāti bahuvacananiddeso.
‘Yadā kāladdhānam’等,如‘māsamāsate kosaṃ sayati’等,虽与不及物动词结合,时间、状态、距离等亦被允许作为业。而‘yadātvi’等,则意在显示:并非一切行为都被听闻到,若实如此,业性又从何而来?此正是他们所说。也不依于可被理解的正在进行的行为……在‘māsamāsate’等中,如同坐等行为与月份等的结合,以及善性等功德与月份等的结合,已进入世间的认知途径。‘na sijjhati’——这不能成立,即:行为不存在,功德与事物不是行为,既与行为无关,便无业性,故不成立。与糖混和的炒米、炒麦,是‘guḷadhānā’。由于学习行为与山、月份、由旬之间,并无完全的关联、无绝对的结合,故在‘māsassa’等中,不用第二格。以‘pubbaṇhe samayanti’,显示‘pubbaṇhe samayo’是第七格等的复合词。以‘accantamevāti’,说明时间与居住行为有完全的关联。‘yaṃsamayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi, taṃ ekaṃsamayaṃ…’显示巴利原文
Yadā kāladdhānamiccādinā‘māsamāsate kosaṃ sayati’ccādo akammakehipi yoge kālabhāvaddhadesānaṃ parehi kammattamanuññātanti ca, yadātviccādinā tu kiriyāva sabbenasabbaṃ na sūyati, tathā sati kuto ca kammattanti teheva vuttantī ca dasseti, gamma mānakiriyāyogopi na nissito… māsamāsateccādīsu āsanādi kiriyānaṃ māsādiyogo viya kalyāṇittaguṇādiyogo ca lokassa patītipathamupayātīti, na sijjhatīti kiriyā na honti guṇadabbānīti kiriyāsambandhābhāvā kammattābhāvoti na sijjhati, guḷena missā dhānā bhajjitayavā guḷadhānā. Ajjhayanakiriyāya pabbatena ca māsakosānaṃ sākallena sambandhābhāvā accantasaṃyogābhāvoti māsassātiādīsu na dutiyā. Pubbaṇhe samayanti iminā pubbaṇhe samayoti sattamīāmādisamāsaṃ dasseti, accanta mevāti iminā samayassa sākallena viharaṇakiriyāya sambandhamāha, yaṃsamayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi, taṃ ekaṃsamayanti sambandho, upasaṅkamanakiriyāyaccantameva yuttoti iminā nivāsanaviharaṇa kiriyāhipi pubbaṇhasamayādīnamaccantameva yuttataṃ upalakkheti, pakārantarenāpi siddhiyamāsaṅkamubbhāvayati ‘yadā tvi’ccādinā, vibhattiyā vipallāso yathāpakatamatikkamma aññathā bhavanaṃ, idha pana sattami yampattāyaṃ sattamyatthe bāhulakena ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’cceva dutiyāppatti.
“Tatiyābhimatā”:依据“apavagge tatiyā”(2-3-6)一句,波你尼派视此为繁冗。然而,时间与距离如何能成为工具?为消除此疑并成立其工具性,遂有“tathāpi”等说。“tathāpi”:纵然依所说次第,由于工具性可能存在,第三格亦得成立。“tañca”:即彼工具。“Kārakamajjhe”:此为第六格复合词,且以“kāraka”一词统摄七种句法成分,故说“dvinnaṃ kattusattīnaṃ majjhe”。纵使是如提婆达多般不可再分的作者,在其内部分别出的种种作者能力之间,也有时间、距离。为彰显能力差别,乃说“tathāhi”等。“ekatthā”:于同一提婆达多之中。与“dvīhetīte (bhuñjikriyā) sādhananti”相关联。“dvīha”即两日的集合,于其中。由“isumasatī”或“isumhi āso assa”所成的“issāsa”一词,显示所理解的行为,即“isvasane”。“nanvi”等是问难。“dhanupa显示巴利原文
Tatiyābhimatāti ‘‘apavagge tatiyā’’ti (2-3-6) vacanena pāṇiniyānaṃpapañcattamabhimatā, kathampana kāladdhānaṃ karaṇattamiccāsaṅkiya karaṇattamesampaṭipādento āha-‘tathāpi’ccādi, tathāpīti vuttakkamena karaṇattasambhavā tatiyāya vijjamānāyapi, siyāti tatiyā siyā, tañcāti taṃ karaṇañca. Kārakamajjheti ettha chaṭṭhī samāso kārakasaddena ca sattikārakaṃ gahitanti (āha) ‘dvinnaṃ kattusattīnaṃ majjhe’ti, abhinnassāpi hi ekassa devadattādikattuno bhinnānaṃ taṃsamavetānaṃ kattusattīnaṃ majjhe kāladdhānāni, sattibhedameva byañjayamāha-‘tathāhi’ccādi, ekatthāti ekasmiṃ devadatte, dvīhetīte (bhuñjikriyā) sādhananti sambandho, dvinnaṃ ahānaṃ samāhāro dvīhaṃ tasmiṃ. Isumasatīti vā, isumhi āso asseti vā nipphannena issāsasaddena gammamānaṃ kiriyaṃ dasseti ‘isvasane’ti, nanviccādi codyaṃ, dhanupañcasataṃ koso, evamaññateccādi parihāro, chaṭṭhiyāsampattāyanti kosassekadeseti evaṃ chaṭṭhiyā sampattāyaṃ, muttasaṃsayenedaṃ samānanti mutto saṃsayo yasmiṃ avadhyādo tenetaṃ tulyanti attho. Vuttiyaṃ abhimatāti ‘‘sattamī pañcamiyo kārakamajjhe’’ti (2-3-7) vacanena sattamīpañcamiyo papañcattamabhimatā, dvīhe bhuñjissatīti dvīsu divasesu gatesu bhuñjissatīti attho, ‘‘yabbhāvo bhāvalakkhaṇa’’nti (2-36) sattamī, sakasakakārakavacanicchāyevāti hi idaṃ bāhullaṃ nissāya vuttaṃ, dvīhā bhuñjissati kosā vijjhatīti dvīhā nikkhamma bhuñjissati, kosā nikkhamma ṭhitaṃ lakkhaṃ vijjhati upāttavisayo-yamavadhi, kose vijjhatīti kose ṭhitaṃ lakkhaṃ vijjhatīti attho.
“已作义聚合”者,即那些已作义聚合的(词),它们被如此说。“他词义之语”者,即语(vutti)在他词义中的(复合词),是异格他词义复合词。在四个复合词中,由于“行等”(gatyādi)各自为主,有人认为,在其后使用的“义”(attha)一词,与“行等”逐一结合。接着,若在经中只说“payojje”(于所使),如何能理解为“所使者自己是作者”,从而需要作“payojje kattari”(于所使的作者)的注释呢?为遣此疑,说“行等义”等。以“等”字摄“觉等”(bodhādi)。“彼业能者”者,即对于彼行等业,能者才被指派,这是关联。“于造业中能者”即是作者,故说“而他即是作者”。由于第二格已成就:依后文所说之理,由于所使的作者之业性(kammatta)成就,依“于业用第二格”这一经句,于业中第二格已成就。此规则有何特征?为何为此而开始?故说“行等义之……”等。将以“正是这些……”等来举出反例。若如此承认,则承认“所使的作者非业”,而注释为“于所使的作者”,这是其义。又以“而能力……”等说明能力之自性。“行等义”是分词。“被指派者由于与称为使役者作用的业相关联,故成为业”,这是其义。此处意趣为:“由于是行等业的手段,所使者虽是作者,但他被使役者在行等中驱使时,与使役者作用特征的业相关联,若非业,则成何物?故依‘否则不成’为特征的能力,他正是成为业。”以“被认知”一句,说明仅由认知即可知其业性,而自性上,所使者仍是作者,这也令知。“使役者”于一切处应知为天授等。“取义”之故:不说“声无业、可食等”,而说“声义无业、可食等”,这是取“义”字之故。“觉义”的例证,是余词。问:在显示言说目的时,应仅举出言说而提问,为何以“正是这些”这一不存在的(词)来提问?为遣此疑,说“正是这些……”等。依前说次第,由于言说是为了确定,故可得“唯”(eva)字。因“此”(eta)字是关联词,故依其所关联,如所列的“行等”作为差别,被略摄而指称,故认为“正是这些”已作。“(天授去……乃至……不成为)”以此阐明此义:“虽由与业关联,所使者与作者一样,业性也会发生,但因说‘payojje’(于所使),故于作者天授,第二格不发生。”“所许”者,依“行、觉等”(1-4-52)经,规定所使作者的业想,于彼所使,第二格是所许。“carahi”一词用于提问。“于‘payojeti’此所举”者,其时当如何?这是余词。即“yadā carahi……”等句末,有“于‘payojeti’此所举,于言说近处,其时当如何”的句补,当知此义。“yāvatā”是似第三格的质词,表“因为”义。因为第二格获得,故应成为“以耶输达多”,这是关联。显示巴利原文
Katacatthasamāsāti kato catthasamāso yesu te tathā vuttā, aññapadatthavuttayoti aññapadatthe vutti yesanti byadhikaraṇaññapadatthasamāso, cattasamāse gatyādīnaṃ visuṃvisuṃ padhānattā tehi paraṃ payujjamāno atthasaddo gatyādīhi paccekamabhisambajjhatīti maññate, atha sutte ‘payojje’iccetāvatyuccamāne payojjo sayaṃ kattāti kathaṃ viññāyati yena ‘payojje kattarī’ti vivaraṇaṃ katamiccāsaṅkiyāha-‘gatyādyattha’miccādi, ādisaddena bodhā dīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ, takkiriyāsamatthovāti tassā gatyādikāya kiriyāya samattho eva niyujjateti sambandho, kiriyākaraṇe samattho nāma kattāvāti āha-‘soca kattā’ti. Dutiyāya siddhāyāti vakkhamānanayena payojjassa kattuno kammattasiddhiyā ‘‘kamme dutiyā’’ti sutteneva kamme dutiyāya siddhāya. Kiṃ lakkhaṇo-yaṃ niyamo yadatthami damārabhīyaticcāha-‘gatyādyatthāna’miccādi, paccudāharīyissate ‘etesameve’ccādinā, tathācābbhupagame, payojjo kattā na kammaṃ tyabbhupagamma payojje kattarī’ti vivaritanti attho, sāmatthiyampanaiccādinā sāmatthiyasarūpamāha, gati ādyatthānanti padacchedo, niyujjamāno payojakabyāpārasaṅkhātāya kiriyāya sambandhīyamānattā kammabhūtova bhavatīti attho, ayametthādhippāyo ‘‘gamanādikiriyāya sādhanattā yadipi payojjo kattā, tathāpi so payojakena gamanādīsu byāpāriyamāno payojakassa byāpāralakkhaṇāya kiriyāya sambandhīyamāno yadi kammaṃ na hoti aññathā kiṃ hotīti aññathānupapattilakkhaṇena sāmatthiyena kammabhūtova hotī’’ti ( ), patīyateti iminā patītivasenevāssa kammatā, sabhāvato tu payojjo kattāvātipi ñāpeti, payojakoti sabbattha devadattādiko viññeyyo, atthagahaṇassāti ‘‘saddākammakabhajjādīna’’nti avatvā ‘‘saddatthākammakabhajjādīna’’nti atthaggahaṇassa, bodhatthassa udāharaṇanti seso, nanu vacanappayojanaṃ dassayatā vacanamevopadassiya pañho kātabbo, atha ‘etesamevā’tyavijjamāneneva kathaṃ tyāsaṅkiyāha ‘etesameve’ccādi, heṭṭhā vuttakkamena niyamatthattā vacanassa evakāro labbhati, sambandhivacanattā etasaddassa tena yathāpaṭhitā gatyādayova visessabhūtā saṅkhepena parāmasīyantīti ete samevāti katanti maññate , (gacchati devadattoti…pe… nahotīti) iminā imamatthañca joteti ‘‘yadipi kiriyābhisambandhā payojjassa viya kattunopi kammattampasajjati, tathāpi payojjeti vuttattā kattari devadatte dutiyā nappasajjatī’’ti, abhimatāti ‘‘gatibuddhyā’’di (1-4-52) suttena payojjassa kattuno kammasaññaṃ vidhāya tasmiṃ payojjedutiyābhimatā, carahisaddo pucchāyaṃ, payojetīti asmiṃ uddese tadā kathaṃ bhavitabbanti sesoti yadācarahiccādivākyassāvasāne payojetīti asmiṃ uddese vacanasamīpe’tadā kathambhavitabba’nti pāṭhaseso hotīti attho veditabbo, yāvatāti tatiyantapaṭīrūpako nipāto, yasmā dattho vattate, yasmā dutiyā pappoti tasmā ‘yaññadattene’ti bhavitabbanti sambandho.
以“由规则……”等,说明开示此言的目的。又以“而彼第三格,何时……”等,令人了知“harati”(夺)在非食义中也有第三格。“于两处”者,即第二格已得与未得之位。“vibhāsā”即“vikappa”(选择),是其义。“kāreti”在使役造作中,“lettā”等有“latta, etta, aya”等替换。“vada”在言说中,“abhivādana”即敬礼,由于作此敬礼,依“以词根义为名”(5-12)此规则,名为词根的“abhivādi”被列于“abhivādi”经中,故说“从abhivādi……”等。显示巴利原文
Niyameneccādinā vacanārambhassa payojanamāha, sāpi tatiyāpi yadātviccādinā harati nāhāratthe tipi viññāpeti, ubhayatthāti dutiyāya pattāya appattāya ca, vibhāsā vikappoti attho, kāretikara-karaṇe, lettāyādesātilatta ettaayādessa, vada-vacane, abhivadanamabhivādo taṃ karotīti ‘‘dhātvatthenāmasmī’’ti (5-12) imhi nāmadhātu ‘abhivādi’tisutte niddiṭṭhoti āha-‘abhivādismā’iccādi.
其中,“khādayati”(令食)源自“adati”(食),“ada”为“食”义。“avhāpayati”(令唤)源自“vhe”(唤),前加“ā”。依据“于使役者作用,有ṇāpi……”(5-16)的规则,在“ṇāpi”中,前位元音消失。“kandayati”(令哭)源自“kanda”,兼具“唤”与“哭”之义。显示巴利原文
Khādayati ādayati khāda, ada=bhakkhaṇe, avhāpayati vhe=avhāne āpubbo, ‘‘payojakabyāpāre ṇāpice’’ti (5-16) ṇāpimhi pubbasaralopo, kandayati kanda=avhānarodanesu.
“vahissa aniyantuke”(无驭者之运)这一经文的意思是:“当‘运’词根所表示的作者为被使役者时,若没有驭者,则不出现第二格。”驭者,即车夫,是令业得以成就的支配者。说此义后,为加以阐明,便说“业支”等。“业支”,即业的资具,例如力牛等,是业的成因。“令支配已”,意即在一应作之业的对象中,使其安立。“vāhayati bhāraṃ devadattena”(以天授令运重担)中,天授是智者,他无需驭者而自己运重担,因此是无驭者的作者。“vāhayati bhāraṃ balībadde”(以力牛令运重担)中,力牛若无驭者便不能运,因此是有驭者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vahissāniyantuke’’ti gaṇasutte ayamettho ‘‘vahissadhātussa payojje kattari niyanturahite dutiyā na bhavatī’’ti, niyantā sārathi kiriyāsiddhiṃ niyāmakoti vatvā tameva pakāsetumāha-‘kiriyaṅga’miccādi, kiriyaṅga kiriyopakaraṇabhūtaṃ balī baddādiṃ kiriyākāraṇaṃ, niyametvāti ekasmiṃ karaṇīye kiriyā visaye patiṭṭhapetvā, vāhayati bhāraṃ devadattenetyatra hi devadatto paññavā puriso niyantāramantareneva bhāraṃ vahatītyaniyantuko kattā, vāhayati bhāraṃ balībadde iccatra tu balībaddā niyantā ramantarena na vahantīti saniyantukā.
“bhikkhissa ahiṃsāyaṃ”(于比丘无害义)这一经文的意思是:“当‘食’词根具有无害义时,其所使的作者不出现第二格。”然而,此处‘食’词根如何具有无害义呢?无害是有思心所,而此‘食’并非有思心所。因此说“一切……”等。“一切”指树等,即句中所说的种种事物。现在,为了显示与一切见相符的无害义,而说“若……”等。有人问:此语法解释是依佛语而立,既然如此,只应显示共通义即可,何必引入其他见解?这实是一种沉默的回应,当知是无因而起的言语。然而,为了随顺他义而作的辛劳,对于大福德智者来说,视同无事。因为这里另有深意:“在他人宗派中,诸弟子也因此得以成就;或者,在某些时间、某些地方,那些了解该宗派的人若看到此,便能由此悟入;像这样,已经获得佛语净信的智者,由于这种悟入,对佛世尊的净信会逐渐更加坚固。”因此,在处处涉及种种语法例证时,也应根据道理了知各自的目的,并非这位论师在从事无意义的谈论。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhikkhissāhiṃsāya’’nti gaṇasuttassāyamattho ‘‘bhakkhissāhiṃsatthassa payojje kattari dutiyā na bhavatī’’ti, atha kathamettha hiṃsatthatā bhakkhissa hiṃsā hi cetanāvati sambhavati, na cetthasassaṃ cetanāvantanti āha-‘sabbe’iccādi, sabbeti rukkhādayo, bhāvā padatthā, idāni sabbadassanānukūlahiṃsatthatamupadassetumāha-‘yadive’ccādi, nanu buddhavacana nissitamidaṃ byākaraṇaṃ, tathā sati sammatameve-ttho-padassetvā gantabbaṃ kinnāmāññadassanopagātādhirenāti tuṇhī hoti nikkāraṇissā bhavato-pāyoti viññāyati, paratthānubaddhakicchaṃ pana mahāpuññapaññā na kiñci viya maññanti, hoti (hi) etena parattho ‘‘matantarepi siddhi sissānaṃ, taṃtaṃ mataññuno vā kadāci karahaci yadidamavalokeyyuṃ te cetthāvatāraṃ labheyyuṃ etādiso ca paññavā paṭiladdhabuddhavacanappasādo’ti tadavatārena ca buddhe bhagavati kamena daḷhaṃ pasādaṃ paṭilabheyyu’’nti, evamevaṃ tattha tattha taṃtaṃbyākaraṇodāharaṇappasaṅgepi tadanusāreneva tantaṃpayojanaṃ veditabbaṃ, na niratthakakathāpasuto-yamācariyoti.
对于“duh”等词根,我们的无上师——他以宝思庄严论等种种方式彻知种种义理,具足大智慧与辩才,为诸智者之主、大主,并为善逝教法宝作最上饶益——在指出“于此应审察”之后,引用了多种论典,作了许多开示。然而,我们在此仅依止师所意许的部分阐明其义。虽然诸论典见解有种种差异,但依循善巧的用法,在主要业处出现“tyādi”等之处、在次要业处出现“nīvahādi”等之处,以及两者兼备的地方,这一切在此都依论师等的意趣次第加以阐明,故说“duhādīnaṃ”等。此处的“ādi”一词表示种类,由此摄取了“yāci”等。“kammadvayayuttānaṃ”是简别第六格,因此连接为:在双业相应的词根中,于次要业处有“gavādo kamme tyādippabhutayo”等。“iccādi”中的“ādi”一词摄取了“avarundhati vajaṃ gāvaṃ avarundhīyate vajaṃ go”等。“gamanādyatthānaṃ”中的“ityādi”一词摄取了“bodha”等义。对于“g”
},
{显示巴利原文
Duhādīnaṃ tyevamādo amhākamparamagurunā ratanamatipañcikālaṅkārādikārena nānākārasāratthavedaveditu mahāpaññāpāṭavānaṃ paññavantānaṃ sāminā mahāsāminā sambuddhasāsanaratanavaropakārakena ‘idamettha vicāraṇīyaṃ’tyabhidhāya nānāmatantaramākaḍḍhiya bahuṃ sampaveditamatthi, mayampanettha ācariyenādhippetamattamevālamba atthampa kāsayissāma. Satyapyanekadassanabhede siṭṭhappayogānusārena yattha padhānekammanityādippabhutayodissanti, yatra tvappadhānetyādī, yatrobhayatrapi, taṃsabbamiha bhassakārādyanumatakkamena paṭipādayamāha-duhādīna’miccādi, etthādisaddo pakāravācī, tena yācippabhutayo gayhanti, kammadvayayuttānanti niddhāraṇe chaṭṭhī, tena kammadvayayuttānaṃ majjhe duhādīnamappadhānepi gavādo kamme tyādippabhutayoti yojanā . Iccāditiādisaddena ‘avarundhati vajaṃ gāvaṃ avarundhīyate vajaṃ go’iccādīnaṃ pariggaho, gamanādyatthāna mityādisaddena bodhatthādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Gamīyate gāmo devadattanti ettha kathaṃ payojjattasambhavoti āha-‘purise’ccādi, yajjapi gāmo tuṇhī hoti nibyāpārattā purisova tu gamanakiriyaṃ nipphādeti, tathāpi purisassa gamanakiriyāya yaṃphalappattilakkhaṇaṃ, tamubhinnampi gāmapurisānaṃ samānanti purisa kiriyātulyaphalattā gāmopi gamanakiriyāya kattubyapadese kāraṇaṃ bhavatīti adhippāyo, tathāhi gāmaṃ gacchanto koci gāme āsanne sati vadati ‘āgato gāmo patto gāmo’ti, atoññesanti ye kammadvayayuttā duhādayo gamanādyatthācodāhaṭā, etehi aññesaṃ, padhāne kammebhi ajādimhi padhāne kamme, padhānattampana ajādīnaṃ kiriyāya payojanattā, ajādyatthā hyānayanakiriyārabhyate. Ayampanettha saṅgaho-
‘duhi、yāci、rudhi、pucchi、bhikkhi、ci、bruvi、sāsi’等,
以及 ji、daṇḍi、patthi、manthi 等,这些都属于 duh 等类的词根。
依「gatyādi」经而安立,它们即具「行」等之义。
它们具有「nīvaha、haraka、sā」等义,以及「nīvahādi」等义。
在这些双业动词中,于次要宾语处,「duh」等……
‘tyādi’等词形出现;‘nīvahādi’等则用于精勤之处。
于两种情形,皆依‘gatyattha’等词根的用法而行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duhi yāci rudhi pucchi, bhikkhi ci bruvi sāsi ca; Ji daṇḍi patthi manthī ca, dhātū honti duhādayo. Gatyādisuttapaṭṭhitā, gatyādyatthā bhavanti te; Nīvahaharakasāca, nīvahādī bhavanti te. Dvikammakesu cetesu, appadhāne duhādinaṃ; Tyādippabhutayo honti, padhāne nīvahādinaṃ; Ubhayattha payogānu, sārā gatyatthaādinaṃ’’ti.
然而,其用法应依关联思择及此处所说,于一切处了知。显示巴利原文
Payogo pana sambandhacintāyamiha ca vuttānusārena sabbathā viññeyyā.
7. 以“dhy”等为首的一类显示巴利原文
7. Dhyādi
前文已根据与动作的关联而安立了第二格,故此处说‘idāni’等。若以含义为主来说明,或借助‘ādi’一词,‘hā devadatta’也可成立。而‘hā devadatta dukkhaṃ’中,由于是与苦相关联,而devadatta本身并不与苦结合,因此用的是第一格呼格。问:在与‘antarā’一词连用时,如‘antarā ca rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandaṃ’,此处为何不从‘magga’(道路)一词获得第二格?答:因为无此关联。凡是以某物为中间者,他们才与它相关联,因此仅从他们而获得第二格。或者,即使‘magga’被涵盖其中,在他们与它的关联中,它仍然是与他们相关,因而作为主要方,故不从它得第二格。此处也只获得第六格,如‘antarā tañca mañca kamaṇḍalu’,意为在你我之间的水罐。问:既然存在与‘antarā’的关联,为何不从‘kamaṇḍalu’一词获得第二格?答:因为它是主要的。正如水罐是为自身意义而存在,而你等则是为了他义——作为水罐的限定者而存在。此处水罐为自义而存在,故为主要,因此不从其词干变化,由于是为他义,故不从它得第二格。显示巴利原文
Pubbe kiriyānissayena dutiyāya vihitattā āha ‘idāni’ccādi, dhisaddassa atthappadhāna niddesena vā ādisaddena vā ‘hā devadatta’ntipi hoti, hā devadattadukkhanti tu dukkhena yogā devadattena na yutto hotīti paṭhamāvāmantaṇe. Nanuca antarāsaddena yoge yathārājagahanālandāhi dutiyā antarā ca rājagahaṃ antarā ca nā landa(nti tathā) antarāmaggeti ettha maggatopi kasmā na dutiyāti tenāyogā, yesañhi taṃmajjhaṃ te tena yujjantīti tehiyeva dutiyā, athavābbhupagatepi taṃyoge taṃsambandhīyeva maggoti mukhyattā tato na dutiyā, atrāpi chaṭṭhīyeva pappoti antarā tañca mañca kamaṇḍaluiti, tava mama majjhe kamaṇḍalutyattho, atha kamaṇḍalusaddato dutiyā kasmā na bhavati satīpyantarena yoge tassa padhānattā, tathāhi kamaṇḍaluno sakatthā pavatti, tumhamhānantu paratthā-kamaṇḍaluvisesanattena tesaṃ pavattattā, tatra kamaṇḍaluno sakatthe vattamānattā padhānattenāvatattā pāṭipadikato accutattā parattā paṭhameva bhavatīti jīnindabuddhinyāsa. Nindādi lakkhaṇassa sambandhassa sabbhāvā sabbattha sambandhachaṭṭhiyā sampattāyaṃ vacanaṃ, ākatigaṇo-yaṃ.
8. 相中;特征中显示巴利原文
8. Lakkhaṇi
在‘特征等义’中,也就是解释‘指示词义’时,说‘引导是合适的’等。因为‘引导’具有指示词义的作用,所以说‘因此’。因为想用‘特征’一词来表示原因,因此说‘在其中’等。原因有两种,正如在《善明庄严》中所说:‘生因与知因,是两种原因。’(252)‘共同特征’即共同标示,仅仅是约定性的知因,而非生因。约定也被称为‘特征’,因为它是通过所造作之事而被标示出来的。此处‘生因’也是以特征性的方式被包含,其用意当见于‘随……’(2-10)等处。‘以某种方式’是用来说明‘如是’一词的含义。‘达到’是用来说明‘成为’一词的含义,因为此处‘bhū’词根用于‘到达’义。‘树的特征’意为树作为知因……因为通过闪电而认知树。然而,阿阇黎胜心佛音尊者是依另一种方式解释的,他的见解是——显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇādīsvatthesuti nāmassā yamatthaniddesoti āha ‘abhināyo yutto’ccādi, tenāti abhinā yuttassātthaniddesa kāraṇena, lakkhaṇasaddena hetu vattumicchitoti āha-‘tatthe’ccādi, duvidho hetu, vuttañhi subodhālaṅkāre ‘‘janako ñāpako ceti, duvidhā hetavo siyu’’nti (252), samupalakkhayatīti samupalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅketamattaṃ ñāpakaṃ, na tu janakaṃ, saṅketopi lakkhaṇamuccate lakkhīyate kāriyamānenāti katvā, janakassāpyatra lakkhaṇattena gahaṇe payojanaṃ ‘‘anunā’’ (2-10) iccatra daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kañcipakāranti iminā itthaṃsaddassa atthaṃ vadati. Pattoti iminā bhūtasaddassa, ettha hi bhūdhātu pattiyaṃ vattate, rukkholakkhaṇanti rukkho ñāpakahetūti attho… rukkhena vijjuyā ñāpīyamānattā, ācariyajinindabuddhi pana aññathā vaṇṇayati, tassedaṃ mataṃ-
Kriyāya jotako nāyaṃ, sambandhassa na vācako; Nāpi kriyantarāpekkhī, sambandhassa tu bhedakoti.
此处义为:“它不像‘此欣喜’等中的‘abhi’那样是动作的阐明者,不像属格那样是关系的表述者,也不像‘出村’中的‘nis’字期待‘去’的动作那样期待另一动作,而是关系的简别者、区分者。”为阐明此义,故说“其他则”等。此处“iti”字是举例。“到达树而发光”——如此,通过“到达”的动作,由“到达后”所表示的“使树到达”的动作而生起,这是其义。因为若树未使闪电到达,则作为所标示的闪电与作为标示的树之间的标示与所标示关系,由何成就?当关系被“abhi”阐明时,树的标示性又如何被阐明?因此说“标示义以境域的方式”。通过“如此”等,指出该立场可能出现的过失。其中,通过“在此”等,说出他人为免上述过失而作的补救。通过显示补救,表明此立场亦无过失,故可知此立场也被采纳。正因如此,下文即依前述立场解释。“以提婆达多的善性这种如是状态为境域而存在的母亲,在那里被称为‘母亲’”,故说“母亲的”等。母亲以此状态存在,作为境域;提婆达多则作为有境者。他们之间显示巴利原文
Ayamettha attho ‘‘ayamabhi abhinandatityādīsu viya kiriyāya jotako na hoti, chaṭṭhī viya sambandhassa vācako na hoti, nikkosambītyatra gamanakiriyāpekkhī nisaddo viya nāpi kiriyantarā pekkhī, kiñcarahi sambandhassa tu bhedako visesako bhavatī’’ti tamupadassetumāha-‘aññe tvi’ccādi, ettha itisaddo nidassane, rukkhampatvā vijjotate itievaṃ pattikiriyāya patvātivuttarukkhapāpanakiriyāya janitoti attho, tathāhi rukkhassa vijjuyā pāpanābhāve vijjuyā lakkhiyāya tallaṇassa ca rukkhassa yo lakkhiyalakkhaṇabhāvo sambandho, so kena sampādito bhaveyya, nanu sambandhe abhinā jotīyamāne rukkhassa lakkhaṇavuttitā kathaṃ jotīyatīti āha-‘lakkhaṇatthoca visayabhāvenā’ti, tathācetyādinā tasmiṃ pakkhe sambhāvitaṃ dosamubbhāvayati, tatrāya miccādinā yathāvuttadosaparihārāya parehevābhidhīyamānamparihāramāha, parihāropadassanenāssāpi pakkhassāduṭṭhatākhyāpanenesopi pakkho-bbhupagatotyavaseyo, atoyevupari yathāvutta pakkhanissayeneva byākhyāyate, devadattassa sādhuttasaṅkhātaitthampakārappattiyā visayabhāvenāvaṭṭhitā mātā tattha vattati nāmāti āha-‘mātuyā’tiādi, mātā ca itthambhūte pavattā visaya bhāvena devadatto ca tattha visayībhāvena, tesañca visayavisayībhāvalakkhaṇo sambandho itthampattilakkhaṇāya kiriyāya jāto, so mātusambandho hoti kāraṇavasena, socātinā jotīyatīti mātu tenābhinā yogoti āha-‘yvāya’ccādi, mātusambandhoiti yojanā, itthampattiyāti itthampattilakkhaṇāya kiriyāya karaṇabhūtāya, evaṃ maññate ‘‘kiñcāpi so sambandho devadattenāpyavinābhāvīti tassa sobhinā jotīyate, tathāpi mātusambandhobhinā jotīyatīti ‘mātu tena yogo’ti ca (vuccati)… saddasattiyā taggatāyeva dutiyāya ubhayagatassāpi sambandhassa jotanato’’ti rukkho rukkho tiṭṭhatīti sambandho, ṭhitimpaṭiccāti ṭhitinnissāya esaṃ rukkhānaṃ yo ca sambandhoti yojanā, rukkhānanti iminā rukkhā kiriyāya pare sambandhinoti ñāpeti, ṭhitimpaṭiccāti iminā pana tiṭṭhatisaddavacanīyā sādhyarūpā ṭhitikiriyā rukkhato pare sambandhīti, acetanānaṃ rukkhānamapekkhāvirahepi lokampatītivasena ‘pipatīsā’dīnaṃ viññāyamānattā viññāyamānaṭhānāpekkhaṇakiriyāyasādhyasādhanalakkhaṇo sambandho jātoti viññeyyaṃ, so ca rukkhasambandho-bhinā jotīyatīti āha-‘so’tiādi, dvibbacaneneva jotanīyāti vicchātthe vuttimatte satīpi vibhattiyā jotetumasamatthattā vicchāya jotanāya dvibbavacanaṃ kattabbamevāti adhippāyo.
9. 对、向、反;“pati”前缀显示巴利原文
9. Pati
“执取”意为认可、接受。如果执取的是部分,那么未执取的又如何呢?因此说“然而”等。“多揭罗”与“拘吒”是特定的香与精灵。“属于我”意为归向我,是我的部分,此是意旨。显示巴利原文
Upādiyamānoti abbhupagammamāno, yadi pana upādiyamāno bhāgo, anupādiyamāno kathanti āha-‘yo panā’tiādi, tagarakuṭṭhā gandhabbavisesā, mamābhajatīti maṃ ābhajati, mama koṭṭhāso hotīti adhippāyo.
10. 随、顺、沿着;“anu”前缀显示巴利原文
10. Anu
“非标示性”的意思是:真实誓言是降雨的因,而非仅仅是一种约定——这是它的含义。问:既然此处有因性而无标示性,为何在标示义中却用了第二格?答:为了成立即使在因性中也有标示性,便以同法喻说出顺喻:“凡即使一次……”等。在此,命题是“标示即是真实誓言”;理由(因)是“因为即使一次也能被施设为相”。凡即使一次能被施设为相者,即是标示,例如“您是否见过持瓶的弟子”——当以同法喻来理解其顺喻。“被施设”指有能力。“持瓶者”指瓶在其手中。“api”表疑问。有时有人见过持瓶的弟子,他便以所见为标示而问“是否……”等。接着,若有人说:即使依所说的理由,也仅有标示性,但由于在他处有所否定,为何在因义中不用第三格?对此追问,答道“并非如此”等。“由前否定”指由遮止而来的前否定。因为属格是遮止,而表因义的第三格是通则……当表关系的属格可得时,由于因义第三格这一通则,连不变格的规则也成了属格的遮止……因为为了显示关系的差别,在不变词结合时,即是在那种关系中制定规则。其中,因义第三格的范围比如“以财而家”,不变格的范围比如“随树而发光”。而“随真实誓言而降雨”则是在因义中,当标示的遮止被否定时。显示巴利原文
Natulakkhaṇanti saccakiriyā vuṭṭhiyā hetu hoti, na tu saṅketoti attho, hetuttā lakkhaṇattābhāve saccakiriyāya kathaṃ lakkhaṇe dutiyāti hetuttepi lakkhaṇattamassa sādhento sādhammapayogenānvayamāha-‘yaṃ sakimpi’ccādi, ettha hi lakkhaṇaṃ sacca kiriyāti paṭiññā, sakimpi nimittatāya kappanattāti hetu, yaṃ sakimpi nimittatāya kappate tampi lakkhaṇaṃ bhavati, yathā’api bhavaṃ kamaṇḍalupāṇiṃ sissamaddakkhī’ti sādhammapayogenānvayo daṭṭhabbo, kappateti samatthoti attho, kamaṇḍalu pāṇimhi asseti kamaṇḍalupāṇī, apīti pañhe, kadāci kenaci kamaṇḍalupāṇīsisso diṭṭho so tameva dassanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ katvā pucchati ‘api’tyādinā, atha yathā vuttena hetunopi lakkhaṇattamattu tathāpi paravippaṭisedhena hetumhi tatiyā kasmā na siyāti codayamāha ‘na nvevampi’ccādi, pubbavippaṭisedhenāti apavādapubbavippaṭisedhena, tathāhi chaṭṭhiyā pavādo hoti hetumhi tatiyāvidhi… sambandhachaṭṭhiyā pattāya hetutatiyāvidhānato upapadavibhattividhipi chaṭṭhiyāpavādo… sambandhavisesābhibyattihetunopapadena yoge tasmiṃyeva sambandhe vidhānato, tattha hetutatiyāvakāso ‘dhanena kula’nti, upapadavibhattiyāvakāso ‘rukkhamanuvijjotate’ti, saccakiriyamanu pāvassīti tu hetumhi lakkhaṇe-pavādavippaṭisedhe sati pubbavippaṭisedhena dutiyā bhavati.
11. 与……一起;共同显示巴利原文
11. Saha
问:“以手撒下”时,与山的关联如何成立?答:“与山”等。显示巴利原文
Sahatthe-nuno vattane pabbatena yogo kathanti āha‘pabbatene’ccādi.
以“作为境界”等来说明“于劣义”,即指出这是境界第七格;而说明认知的方式则是“于劣者”等。接着,以“tena”表示随顺,问:由此如何与殊胜者产生关联?为了阐明劣与殊胜的关系,便说“于此”等。“于此”即指“于劣者”等所说的那个;由于殊胜者如舍利弗等,劣者是指从智慧等方面远离者,那个舍利弗等是殊胜者,于是劣义的境界便生起……在此境界中,他的殊胜性得以成立。然而,劣与殊胜的关系应当看作是由某种超越之类的行为所造成的。显示巴利原文
Visayabhāvenātiādinā hīnattheti visayasattamittamāha, vijānanappakāramāha-‘hīne’ccādi, tenāti anunā, kathaṃ tena yuttattaṃ ukkaṭṭhassāti hīnukkaṭṭhasambandhamukhena vibhāvento’tatthā’tiādimāha, tatthāti hīneccādinā vutte tasmiṃ, yatoti ukkaṭṭhasāriputtādiko, hīnoti paññavattādi(to nikkaṭṭho, so sāriputtādiko ukkaṭṭho) hīnatthavisayo jāyate… tabbisaye tassa ukkaṭṭhatā pattito, hīnukkaṭṭhasambandho pana atisāyanādikāya kāyaci kiriyāya katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
何谓“过量”?答曰:“过量与具有过量者的关系”。具有过量者称为adhikī,即khārī(斛)。若离开具有过量者,又如何确定过量与具有过量者的关系?难道离开具有过量者,还能听闻到什么吗?答曰:“于新者”等。iti一词表示原因,是成立如前所述关系的依据。那时,通过upasadda而有联系,意思是那时通过upasadda而与具有过量者相联系。由于关系有两重性,过量者也因upasadda而有联系,为何不成为第七格?答曰:“从过量者”等。正如以同一格位同时显示两方面的关系,从而如闪电般标明第七格的不存在,此处亦然。为说明前述定则,故说“如已被标明的第七格之不存在”。“māṇikā为四斗,khārī为四māṇikā”。显示巴利原文
Kintaṃ ādhikyamiccāha- ‘adhikādhikīsambandho’ti, adhiko assa atthīti adhikī=khārī, athādhikīvinimutte adhikādhikisambandho kathamavasīyate nahyatrādhikī koci sūyaticcāha-‘navine’ccādi, iti saddo hetumhi yathāvuttasambandhasādhano, tadopasaddenayogoti tadā upasaddenādhikinoyogoti attho. Dviṭṭhattā sambandhassa adhikassāpyupasaddena yogā tatopi kasmā na sattamītyāha-‘adhikamhātvi’ccādi, yathā ekāyeva vibhattiyā ubhayagatassāpi sambandhassa jotitattā vijjusaṅkhātalakkhiyā sattamyabhāvo, evamidhā pīti pubbe vuttasamādhimatidisanto āha-‘lakkhitā viya sattamya bhāvo’ti, ‘‘māṇikā caturodoṇā, khāritthī catumāṇikā’’.
何谓“主人”义?答曰:“自有主的关系”。由何种行为所生?答曰:“由保护等行为所生”。而那个tañca是着眼于主人义的中性词。由于关系有多种,故说“于一切关系中”。所谓“ākhyāyate”,其义为“被确立、被知”。为易于理解,故举譬喻——即将已知的伴随特征与未知的所立称为譬喻,如“那个戴耳环者是提婆达多”。戴耳环是已知的,提婆达多(的身份)是未知的,故说“以戴耳环的伴随特征”等。正如两者虽皆有所依,但第六格只从附属的角度说“国王的人”,而不从差别的角度说“人的国王”;同样,在以关系为表达手段的adhinayoga中,也仅从差别的角度成立,而非其他。故说“于此”等。所谓“byatireka”(差别),即与六种格成分相离,关系即是离别;此离别被导致、被获得,此为其义。从两方面:从主人方面与从所属方面。“adhibrahmadatte pañcālā”意为“婆罗门达多所领有的般阇罗人”,即属于婆罗门达多的般阇罗人,因为般阇罗人是所属,不是主人。“adhipañcālesu brahmadatto”意为“般阇罗人中的婆罗门达多”,即婆罗门达多在般阇罗人中,因为婆罗门达多是主人,不是所属。显示巴利原文
Kintaṃ sāmittamiccāha-‘sassāmisambandho’ti, kāya kiriyāya janitoti āha-‘paripālanādikiriyāya janito’ti, tañcāti sāmittāpekkho napuṃsakaniddeso, sambandhassānekavidhattā āha‘sabbattha sambandhe’ti, ākhyāyatetīmassa attho vidhīyate ñāpīyateti, diṭṭhanto-panītottho sukhena paṭipattuṃ sakkāti pasiddhamanuvadiyamānamappasiddhañca vidhīyamānaṃ diṭṭhantamāha-‘yathā yo kuṇḍalī so devadatto’ti, kuṇḍalittampasiddhaṃ, devadattattamappasiddhamiccāha-‘kuṇḍalittānuvādene’ccādi. Yathevobhayādhiṭṭhānattepyupasajjanatova chaṭṭhī ‘rañño puriso’ti, na visessato ‘purisassa rājā’ti, tathā sambandhābhibyañjanakenādhinā yogepi visesanatova bhavati, nāññatoti āha-‘tatthā’tiādi. Byatirekamāpādīyatīti kārakachakkato byatirittattā sambandho byatireko taṃ āpādīyati pāpīyatīti attho, ubhayatoti saṃto sāmito ca, adhibrahmadatte pañcālāti brahmadattassa pañcālā santakā ti attho, santakā hi pañcālā, na sāmi , adhipañcālesu brahmadattoti pañcālānaṃ brahmadatto sāmītyattho.
何谓作者的特征?答曰:“于作者”等。“提婆达多走”等立足于作者;“提婆达多煮饭”等立足于业,即施行行为;此即关系。而“做”一词,以此随义假立便成立“作者”之称谓,如此表明。即使被他人驱使,在自己的业上,自己仍然领受主要性,故说“或被驱使,亦以主要性的方式”。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ lakkhaṇo-yaṃ kattāiccāha-‘kattari’ccādi, gacchati devadattoccādo kattari patiṭṭhitaṃ, pacatyodanaṃ devadattoccādo kamme patiṭṭhitaṃ kiriyaṃ karotīti sambandho, karotīti ca iminā anvattha byapadesova siddho-yaṃ kattu vohāroti ñāpeti, kenaci payujjamānopi sake kamme sayameva padhānattamanubhavatīti‘payutto vā padhānabhāvenā’ti vuttaṃ hoti cettha-
依主要性而为作者,造作应作之业行;
此作者称为未受驱使或受驱使,如此有二种。
显示巴利原文 Padhānatāya yo kattu, kammaṭṭhaṃ kurute kriyaṃ; Sā kattā nāmappayutto, payutto vātyayaṃ dvidhāti.
其中,‘由人所作’为无依托;‘由人驱策而作,如提婆达多所作’为有依托。难道不是由于业行与使令之间的间隔,工具与处所才得成就,而作者却因远因而成就吗?既然如此,为何说‘作者以主要方式作,其他以非主要方式作’——即作者本身以主要方式完成需多种手段成就的业行?显示巴利原文
Tattha purisena katanti appayutto, purisena karoti devadattoti payutto, nanu kiriyā-yamabyavadhānena karaṇādhikaraṇe heva sādhyate kattārā tu dūraṭṭhena, tathāsati kathamanekasādhanasādhanīyaṃ kiriyaṃ kattāva karoti mukhyabhāvenāparetvamukhyabhāvenāti vuccate-
由作者之外的其他手段生起,而与观察等相离;
虽于远处成为助益,作者仍具首要性。
显示巴利原文 Kattutoññesamubbhūtyā, vivittālocanādinā ; Dūrādapyupakāritte, kattu vāttappadhānatā.
此中义如下:作者之外的手段,如工具等,依作者而生起、而存在。正如斧头虽公认具工具之性,然因依于作者而运作,故说‘置于斧上而砍断’时,斧头即成处所。与工具等相离、别异的作者,通过对其行为的观察与看见,而说‘提婆达多存在、有、在’。以‘等’字含摄工具等依彼而有的运作等。以此因缘,虽于远处成为助益,作者仍居首要。显示巴利原文
Ayamettha attho ‘‘kattuno sakāsā aññesaṃ karaṇādīnaṃ ubbhūtyā sambhavenaca, tathāhi pasiddhakaraṇasabhāvopi pharasu kattāyattavuttitāyādhikaraṇambha vati‘pharasumhi ṭhapetvā chindatī’ti, vivittassa karaṇādīhi puthabbhūtassa, kattuno kiriyāya ālocanena dassanena ca ‘devadatto atthi bhavati vijjatī’ti , ādisaddena karaṇādino (tadadhīna) pavattiādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ, iminā kāraṇena dūrato upakārittepi kattuyeva sappadhānatā siyā’’ti, punapi-
然而,锅等虽是无心之物,亦具有作者性;
因为对于词所表达的意义,由于无始以来的错误串习等。
显示巴利原文 Thālyādīnantu kattuttaṃ, hotevācetanānapi; Yato saddassa vutyatthe, micchātyāsena-nādinā.
此处的意思是:即使无心的锅等也具有作者性,虽然如前所述并无主要性之因。何以故?因为对于词所表示的自义,由于无始以来的错误串习,而有词的转起与理解,故说“锅等”。这是什么意思呢?即“词义是一回事,自性义是另一回事,因为词并不在外在事物上起作用”。正如:显示巴利原文
Ayamettha attho ‘‘acetanānampi thālīasiādīnaṃ kattuttambhavati yathāvaṇṇitasappadhānattanimittābhāvepi, kasmāti ce yato kāraṇā atthe attano abhidheyyesaddassa vutti paṭipatti anādinā micchābhyāsenabhavati tasmā thālyādīnantiādi pakataṃ, kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘aññathā saddattho, aññathā sabhāvattho, na hi saddo bāhye vatthumhi byāpāramāpajjati, tathāhi–
因与词的结合方式不同,便执取“燃烧者被烧”;
借由“燃烧”一词,以另一种方式了达燃烧之义。
显示巴利原文 Aññathe vāggi saṃsaggā, dāhaṃ daḍḍhoti maññati; Aññathā dāhasaddena, dāhattho sampatīyate.
外在事物仿佛具有自性,然而,依于无始以来相续的错误串习,将本不存在的外在事物当作工具,于是锅等便被执有“作者性”。而同时,却又——显示巴利原文
Bāhyapadatthassa sabhāvo viya hutvā micchābhyāsena anādinā pana pavattena bāhye vatthūni avijjamānena karaṇabhūtena thālyādīnaṃ kattuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Atha ca pana–
由欲说等转起、具有主要性之因,
所说之作者法,作者即由词而得知。
以单一根本事,依差别而分别,
业性、所作性,以及作者性生起。
显示巴利原文 Vatticchādo pavattehi, sappadhānatta hetuhi; Kattudhammehi vuttehi, kattā saddāva ñāyate. Ekassāmukhyavatthāhi, bhedena parikappane; Kammattaṃ karaṇattañca, kattuttaṃ copajāyate.
如所说“由作者等所生”等,“依声”者:无论那些法是否与作者相关联,依如上所述与作者相联的法之词,唯由声即悟作者,不决定于实物,此即其义。“非根本事”者:由觉知呈现其相,以转变之事为所依,非作者而是自作者,即唯从自体生起业等。正因如此,纵全无实,芽亦由生起作用而为作者,如云“芽生起”,是故说:显示巴利原文
Vuttehīti ‘kattutoññesamubbhūtyā’ccādinā, saddāvāti sadde tedhammā hontu vā mā vā kattusambandhiyathāvuttadhammavacanicchāya saddatova kattā patīyate, niyamena na vatthutoti attho, amukhyā vatthāhīti buddhiyā tadākāratāya pariṇāmāvatthāhi, hantyatta nāvattānanti ekassevāttano kammattādi jāyate, atoyevāccantamasantopi aṅkuro jananakiriyāya kattā bhavati ‘aṅkuro jāyate’ti, vuttaṃ hi–
Purāsañjanito bhāvā, buddhayavatthāni bandhano; Avasiṭṭho satāññena, kattā bhavati jātiyāiti.
“由另一有念者”,即提婆达多等另一有念者。显示巴利原文
Satā aññena devadattādinā.
“何谓‘作具’?”答:“若”等。“若”即“若”之义,以此说明:“纵然经中没有关于作具的教示,但由‘以此而作’故,依义理而得成就作具之名——这便是‘作具’的施设。”于此,有颂云:显示巴利原文
Kintaṃ karaṇaṃ nāmāti āha-‘yo panā’tiādi, yoti yo padattho, iminā idaṃ dīpeti ‘‘karaṇabyapadesāya suttantarābhāvepi karotyaneneti karaṇantyanvatthato pasiddho-yaṃ karaṇavohāro’’ti, atredaṃ paṭibhānaṃ–
Yaṃ vattumicchitaṃ kattu, kriyāyaccantasādhanaṃ; Karaṇantaṃ dvidhā hoti, bāhyabbhantarabhedatoti.
此中,由“所欲说为作者”等语,显示此义:“实无任何实体之成为作具,唯依言思之意欲而安立。于公认之斧等作具,可说‘以斧斩’‘于斧中斩’,故作者与处格亦得成立;于公认之处格,由于存在不均等之差别,如‘以锅煮’等,作具亦得成立。由见此故,应知唯依言思之意欲,安立作具为能作。”且说彼有二种,故言“分为二”等。此中,“以刀斩”为外;“以眼见”为内。由“作具为能作之相”一句,显明“能作”一词乃是“相”之异名。由“本性相应语,因动作非有,唯知为关联”,说明具第六格亦是关联相。至于“平行而跑”等,虽动作实有,因欲说作之义,故亦可用为第二格。“平行跑、不平行跑”即是其义。如是,“以二陀那”意谓“买二陀那之量”;“以五”意谓“以五头为一群之牛,买五头牛”,亦即“作五五而买”之义。复次,依注师之方式建立“第三格安立之结数”,为显示此而言“以本性等”等。所谓“他们作具义之关联”,是说于某动作中,这些本性等成为作具之义,而言说彼动作,即为关联。由于一切义之存在皆不越于此,故言“有”等。“本性相应”者,是说由自性即与此相应,非依实体、庄严等,是其义。当于“作”之转趋中,以本性相应作为作具等时,于作者即……显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃvattumicchitaṃtyādinā idaṃ dasseti-‘‘na vatthuto kiñci karaṇaṃ nāma atthi, vacanicchāvasena pana pasiddhakaraṇānampi pharasuādīnaṃ ‘pharasu chindati, pharasumhi chindatī’ti kattuadhikaraṇattassapi, pasiddhādhikaraṇānampi tadanuttādivisesasambhave thālyā pacatī’ti karaṇattassapi dassanato vacanicchātoyeva karaṇaṃ kārakaṃ viññeyya’’nti, tañca duvidhanti āha-‘dvidhā hotī’tiādi, tattha asinā chindatīti bāhyaṃ, cakkhunā passatītyabbhantaraṃ. Kiriyānimittattā kārakanti iminā kārakasaddassa nimittapariyāyattamāha. Pakati yābhirūpoccādo kiriyāyāvijjamānattā sambandhamattaṃ viññāyatīti sambandhalakkhaṇā chaṭṭhī siyā, samena dhāvatītyādo tu kiriyāya vijjamānattepi kammattaṃ vattumicchitanti dutiyā siyā, samaṃ dhāvati visamaṃ dhāvatītyattho, tathā dvidoṇenāti dvedoṇe kiṇātītyattho, pañcakenāti pañca parimāṇassa pañcako pañcakaṃ vaggaṃ katvā pasavo kiṇāti pañcapañca katvā kiṇātītyatthoti vāttikakārena ‘tatiyā vidhānāyopasaṅkhyānaṃ’kataṃ, taṃ dassetumāha- ‘pakatiādīhī’tiādi, yatthesaṃkaraṇabhāvoti yassaṃ kiriyāyame sampakatyādīnaṃ karaṇattaṃ, taṃ kiriyaṃ kathayatīti sambandho, sabbasseva padatthassa sattābyabhicārato āha-‘bhū’iccādi, pakatiyābhirūpoti sabhāvenāyamabhirūpo bhavati, na tu vatthālaṅkārādinetyattho, karotissa gammamānatte pana pakatiyābhirūpo katotiādi, tadā kattariyeva tatiyā, yaṃ yasmā aññagotto gotamo na hoti atoca gotamo bhavatīti sambandho, nanuca dvidoṇa pañcakā kayampaṭicca kammabhūtā honti dvidoṇādinā keyattā tato kimuccate‘kayampaṭicca dvidoṇapañcakā karaṇāni bhavantī’tyā saṅkīyāha-‘tathāhi’ccādi, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti-‘‘dvidoṇādisaddena hi na gayhupagaṃ vatthumuccati, tehi pana dvidoṇādyatthaṃ mūlaṃ tādatthiyā bhihitanti na vuttadosāvasaro’’ti.
为了显示按照顺序的来去行为与以粗大性质为特征的牛粪之间的关系,而说‘taṃ yathā’等;即使只是显示一个例子,也以此意图来显示,因此说‘sabbattheva vā’等。在‘与儿子一同来’等情形中,关于来去等行为,有两个施事者,分为主要与次要;其中,对于主要者,或依行为结果成立的道理,或依多言说的方式,主要施事者上有格位语尾,而其他非主要施事者上,则依‘非施事者处用第三格’的规则,第三格得以成立。因此,有人以为此语法规则的施设没有意义,而提出‘nanu’等质疑。对此,回答说‘tenābhidhīyate pitā’等,即父亲是主要施事者。虽然在行为关系中父亲与儿子同等,但父亲是主要的,因为是由词语所促使;儿子是非主要的,因为不是由词语所促使。因为对词语作用的考察,才有主要与次要的分别。只有父亲,才通过‘来’等词语的同位关系,以词语表达出来去行为的关联;而非儿子,这是由于词语能力本身的性质。词语的能力就是如此:只有父亲才能在此处表达出与行为的关联,儿子则不能。这样,‘āgato’等单数形式才得以产生;否则,就应该是‘pitā puttā āgatā’这样的复数形式。如果按照前述道理第三格已经成立,那么‘在已经成立的情况下,语法规则的施设是为了确定或为了显示其他选项’,而这里既非确定,也非其他选项,那么此语法规则又有何用?带着这样的意图,他说‘appadhāneyeva’等。‘Nayidameva’等是答复。‘只是想表达单纯的共同存在’——这是句子的连接。‘由于能力’:因为‘共同行动’是以分别(不同个体)为基础的,所以儿子的行为关联也能被理解;否则,共同行动如何可能?——以此义理的力量。‘Atthaggahaṇaṃ’:在经文中‘sahatthena’这一义理的提及。‘Pariyāyatthaṃ’:其词源解释为‘parito ayanti avagacchanti atthamaneneti pariyāyo’,即通过义理而全面理解,故称为‘pariyāya’(同义语),其目的为义理。此处并非决定性地只取同义语之义,因为即使没有‘saha’一词的使用,或使用其同义词,只要通过‘共同性’这一格位含义建立关联,第三格就会成立。因此,即使没有‘saha’等词的使用,只要其义理被理解之处,第三格依然成立……因为与所理解的共同性含义相关联,例如‘syādi syāne’(若有,则应在近处)这一规则。‘Saha pariyāyena’:通过‘saha’一词的同义词。‘Visesānupādānato’:因为不像波你尼经‘sahayutte'ppadhāne’(2-3-19)那样,特别提及‘非主要者’这一限定。显示巴利原文
Yathākkamamāgamanakiriyāya thūlattaguṇena gomantadabbena ca sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘taṃ yathe’ccādimāha, udāharaṇamattaṃ dassentopi iminā adhippāyenāpi dassetīti vuttaṃ ‘sabbattheva vā’tiādi, puttena sahāgatotiādīsu āgamanādikiriyampaṭicca dve kattāro padhānāppadhānavasena, tesu padhāne kāriyasampaccayañāyena vā bahulaṃvacanena vā padhāne kattari paccayo, itare’kattari tatiyā’tyeva tatiyā siddhā, tato-yaṃ vacanārambho-natthakoti maññamānoco deti ‘nanvi’ccādinā, ttenābhidhīyate piteti padhānakattā, tulyopi kiriyāsambandhe pitāputtānaṃ pitātra padhānaṃ saddacoditattā, putto-ppadhānamasaddacoditattā , saddabyāpārāpekkhāya hi padhānāppadhānāya vavatthānaṃ, piturevātrāgatādisaddasāmānādhikaraṇyā āgamanakiriyā sambandho saddenoccate, netarassa saddasattisabhāvato, tathā vidhā hi saddassa satti yato piturevātra kiriyā sambandhaṃ sakkoti paṭipādetuṃ, na puttassa, evañcāgatoccādo ekavacanamupajjate, aññathā hi bahuvacanaṃ siyā, ‘pitā puttā āgatā’ti. (Yadi) vuttanayena tatiyā siddhā ‘siddhe satyārambho niyamāya vā vikappāya vā’ na cettha niyamo, nāpi vikappo, tato kimanena yogenā tyāsayenāha-‘appadhāneyeva’ccādi. Nayidamevamiccādi parihāro. Sahabhāvamattaṃ vattumiṭṭhaṃ vāti yojanā, sāmatthiyāti bhedādhiṭṭhānattā sahatthayogassa puttassāpi kiriyābhisambandho viññāyati kathamaññathā sahatthayogo siyāti iminā attha balena. Atthaggahaṇanti sutte ‘‘sahatthene’’ti atthaggahaṇaṃ. Pariyāyatthanti parito ayanti avagacchanti atthamaneneti pariyāyo attho payojanaṃ yassāti viggaho, ettha ca pariyāyatthamevāti nāvadhāraṇaṃ, atoyeva vināpi sahasaddappayogaṃ tappariyāyappayogaṃ vā sahatthena yoge vidhānato asatyapi sahādisaddappayoge yattha tadattho gamyate tatthāpi bhavatyeva tatiyā… gamyamānena sahatthena yogā, yathā‘‘syādi syāne’’ti. (3-1) Saha pariyāyenāti sahasaddassa pariyāyato. Visesānupādānatoti ‘‘sahayutte-ppadhāne’’ti (2-3-19) pāṇinīya sutte viya appadhāneti visesassānupādānato.
18. 特相中。显示巴利原文
18. Lakkhaṇe
‘被标记者’即‘lakkhaṇaṃ’(标记),指约定俗成的记号,例如水瓶等。有人以为,由于在所指之义上并无行为结果产生,故表示该义的语尾不应使用;针对这种想法而作的解释‘lakkhaṇe vattamānato’(从表示标记的词语而来),他超越此解释而说‘yo attho’等,即‘所表示之义’。‘vattamānato’意为‘被理解’……并非从名词而来的语尾施设规则所包含。‘upātto’意为‘被采用’。对于某个已进入某种状态者,第三格用于其标记,例如‘rukkhaṃ pati vijjotanaṃ’(闪电向树);但为了不使第三格仅用于单纯的标记,波你尼派学者在经中特别加入了‘itthambhūtalakkhaṇe’(在成为某种状态者的标记中)这一说法。将此记在心中,他提出质疑说‘nanu’等。‘itthambhūtassa lakkhaṇaṃ’是第六格复合词,意为‘已成为某种状态者的标记’。‘āpannassa’即‘bhūtassa’(已存在的)。对一般性进行分别的特殊性、类别,被称为‘prakāra’(方式)。例如‘tidaṇḍakena paribbājakam addakkhī’(他看见一个手持三杖的游行者),其中‘人’是一般性,‘游行者身份’是方式,他达到了游行者身份,其三杖是其标记。通过说‘upalakkhaṇattā’(因为是附带标记),他指出这并非‘已成为某种状态者的标记’。‘upalakkhaṇaṃ’即约定俗成的记号。‘Nayidamatthi’等是答复。在‘rukkhaṃ pati vijjotanaṃ’这个例子中,由于没有任何‘已成为某种状态者’存在,所以看不出‘itthambhūta’这一特别提及有何必要,因为它只是排除(其他情况)。但在‘rukkhaṃ pati vijjotate’(闪电向树闪耀)这个例子中,由于存在被称为‘闪电’的、已成为某种状态的事物,当第三格可能适用时,为了排除它,除了上述道理之外,别无任何依据——为了让人理解这一点,他说‘avassaṃ’等。‘aññathā’:如果不这样承认,而采用‘itthambhūtalakkhaṇe’这一说法,那么……。预想到‘itthambhūta’论者的答复,他说‘na ca’等。‘vattuṃ’是省略的动词。‘ca’表示强调。意思是‘根本不可能’。‘dutiyāvidhānasāmatthiyā’:由于‘patiparīhi bhāge ca’(2-9)这一规则中施设了第二格,为什么不可能?他回答说‘atthi’等。因为如果没有目的,就没有‘能力’这回事。那么,为什么在‘kamaṇḍalu pāṇimhi assa’(水瓶在手中)这样的表达中不用第三格?他回答说‘kamaṇḍalu’等。‘kamaṇḍalussa setassa ca upalakkhaṇabhāvena anupādānato’是连接,意为:因为水瓶和白色只是附带标记,所以不被采用。以此,他指出当有主要被表示者时,应使用其词语。‘visiṭṭhāvayavādheyyena’:手是因水瓶而具有特殊性的肢体,其被赋予者(即所持之物)是水瓶,以此义。‘由于某个肢体发生变化,从而整体的变化被标记出来,对此用第三格’——其他论师因此施设了‘yenāṅgavikāro’(2-3-20)这一规则。他对此说‘yena’等。其中,通过‘yena’一词,以原因义指出了发生变化的肢体;而‘aṅga’一词被用作表示整体。因此他说‘yena’等。‘难道不是吗?像‘独眼’等,由于表示的是固定属性,使用‘眼’这个词是不合适的,因为没有区别性?’这不是过失,因为这是世间对词语的惯用法,而世人在使用词语时并不考虑轻重主次等。例如,世间既说‘sīsapā’(有头者),也说‘rukkho sīsapā’(树是有头者)。但对此讲究的人,就会使用‘akkhi’(眼)这个词。或者,在从一般性入手时,特殊性才值得使用。因为如果只说‘akkhi’(眼),会有疑惑:‘他到底想表达什么?’因此才说‘kāṇo’(独眼者)。‘他不用眼来观察,是好的吗?’那么‘kāṇo’到底是什么意思?预想到‘akkhikāṇam assa’(他的眼是瞎的)这样的表达为何不成立,他把在‘kamaṇḍalu pāṇimhi assa’(水瓶在手中)那里所说的答复,在此处指示出来,说‘heṭṭhā viya appasaṅgo’(如前述,不适用)。显示巴利原文
Lakkhīyatyanenāti lakkhaṇaṃ saṅketo, kintaṃ kamaṇḍaluppabhuti, atthe kāriyassāsambhavā taṃvācīhi vibhattīti maññamānena yaṃvivaraṇaṃ kataṃ ‘lakkhaṇe vattamānato’ti, tamullaṅgiyātthaṃ vadati ‘yo attho’iccādi, vattamānatoti viññāyati… nāmasmā paccayavidhānappa saṅgato, upāttoti gahito. Kañcippaṇaramāpannassa lakkhaṇe tatiyā yathā siyā ‘rukkhampati vijjotana’miccatra lakkhaṇamatte mā bhavīti pāṇinīyehi ‘‘itthambhūtalakkhaṇe’’ti (2-3-21) itthambhūtaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, tammanasi nidhāya codayamāha–‘nanvi’ccādi, itthambhūtassa lakkhaṇanti chaṭṭhīsamāso, āpannassāti bhūtassa, sāmaññassa bhedako viseso pakāro vuccate, tathāhi ‘tidaṇḍakena paribbājakamaddakkhī’ti manussattasāmaññassa paribbājakattampakāro, tamparibbājako patto, tassa tidaṇḍakaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ. Upalakkhaṇatteti iminā itthambhūtassa lakkhaṇattābhāvamāha, upalakkhaṇanti saṅketo. Nayidamatthiccādi parihāro, rukkhampati vijjotananti ettha kassaci itthambhūtassābhāvā itthambhūtaggahaṇe payojanaṃ na dissati tannivattanato, rukkhampati vijjotateti etthatu itthambhūtassa vijjusaṅkhātassa atthassa sabbhāvā tatiyāppattiyaṃ taṃnivattiyā yathāvuttaṃ ñāyamantarena nāññaṃ kiñci paṭisaraṇamatthīti saññāpayamāha-‘avassa’miccādi, aññathāti evamanabbhupagamma ‘itthambhūtalakkhaṇe’ti vacane karīyamāne sati, itthambhūtavādino uttaramāsaṅkiyāha-‘nacā’tiādi, vattunti vacanaseso, co-vadhāraṇe, neva sakkāti vuttaṃ hoti, dutiyāvidhānasāmatthiyāti ‘‘patiparīhi bhāge cā’’ti (2-9) kasmā na sakkāti āha-‘atthi’ccādi, asati hi payojane sāmatthiyanti bhāvo. Atha kamaṇḍalu pāṇimhi assāti ādo tatiyā kasmā na siyā tyāha-‘kamaṇḍalu’iccādi, kamaṇḍalussa setassa ca upalakkhaṇa bhāvenānupādānatoti sambandho, iminā upādātuno savacasi satantatamāha, visiṭṭhāvayavādheyyenāti pāṇi kamaṇḍalunā visiṭṭhovayavo, tassādheyyo kamaṇḍalu tenāti attho. Yenāṅgena vikatena aṅgino vikāro lakkhīyate tato tatiyā yathāsiyāti parehi ‘‘yenāṅgavikāro’’ti (2-3-20) āraddhaṃ, tadāha-‘yene’ccādi, tattha yasaddena vikatāvayavo hetuttena niddiṭṭho aṅgasaddo ca samudāyavacano upātto tenāha-‘yeneccādi, nanuca kāṇādīnaṃ niyataguṇīnamabhidhāyittā akkhisaddassa payogo na yutto byāvattiyābhāvāti, nesa doso, lokiyo-yaṃ saddassa vohāro, lokassa ca saddappayoge gurulaghumpatyadayo natthi, tathāhi lokena ‘sīsapāti’pi vuccate, rukkho sīsapātipi, yassa tu tatthādaro, so-kkhisaddaṃ payujjateva, athavā sāmaññupakkame viseso payogamarahati, akkhi(nāti) hi vutte sandeho siyā ‘kimassa vattumicchita’nti tato kāṇoti vuccate, nākkhinā nirūpayati sobhanoti, kiñcarahi kāṇoti, akkhikāṇamassetyādo kasmā na siyāti āsaṅkiya‘kamaṇḍalu pāṇimhi assā’tyatra yo vutto parihāro, ta metthopadisanto āha-‘heṭṭhā viya appasaṅgo’ti.
当某果报中见到能力时,此处因缘便已确立。因为在一处,由于见到能力,即使未造作果报,也因与之相应而被称作因;而当有伴随的造作者时,则成为分离缘,由此果报会有变异,因此说‘即使未令生起’。在缺少因格第三格时,说明其因由:‘仅具彼造作相应性’等。显示巴利原文
Kismiñci phale diṭṭhasāmatthiyetthe hetu niruḷho. Ekatra hi diṭṭhasāmatthiyottho taṃyoggatāya kāriya (ma)karontopi hetu vuccate sati saha kārinyasati ca vidhurappaccayo papā(ta) to, tena kāriyassa byabhicāro, tenevāha- ‘anipphādayantopī’ti, kāraṇe tatiyāyābhāve kāraṇamāha- ‘takkiriyāyoggatāmatte’ccādi.
“属性”即依他而存在,意指对于他者有所系属等,成为其支分,以无生命性等为因。以此说明“属性”一词指向非主要之词。凡非主要者,即是依他而存在,故将“属性”释为“依他而存在”。凡为他者而取用者,即为非主要,因其以附属形态被取用,例如“因无生命性而被束缚,树有枝叶,火有烟”等。因此说“成为他者之形态”。所谓语法规则,即“于属性义中,阴性词可选”(2-3-25)这样的规则。以“阴性”等显示第五格形态亦被认可,因此说“于两处”等。若问:“依‘从第五格’(4-95)之经,派生词缀如何成为第五格?”答:“于第五格之表述”等。以此经句,与第五格无关而作连接。由于可选第五格之规则,亦应有第三格形态,将此质疑置于心中,说明仅以第五格为例,而第三格之例应依第一例类推,故说“唯第五格”等。以“无有”即“行灭”等,为第三格之形态。显示巴利原文
Upādhi visesanaṃ, parāṅgabhūteti parassa bandhattā(dino) vidhānā yāṅgabhūte jaḷattādihetumhīti attho, iminā guṇasaddo yamappadhānavacanoti vadati, yañcāppadhānaṃ tamparāṅgabhūtanti guṇetīmassa ‘parāṅgabhūte’ti atthamāha, yañhi paratthamupādīyate tadappadhānamanu vādarūpenopādīyamānattā, yathā ‘jaḷattā baddho, rukkho yaṃ sīsa pattā, aggi ettha dhumatte’ccādi, tenevāha-‘parattharūpāpanna’nti, vāvidhānanti ‘‘vibhāsā guṇe-thiyaṃ’’nti (2-3-25) evaṃ vidhānaṃ, itthiyantiādinā pañcamīrūpassapi abhimatabhāvaṃ dasseti, tenevāha-‘ubhayatthā’tiādi, nanu ‘to pañcamyā’’ti (4-95) suttena taddhitapaccayantassa kathaṃ pañcamyantatā tyāsaṅkiyāha-‘pañcaminiddese’ iccādi, iminā suttena pañcamiyā vināti yojanā, vā pañcamiyā vidhānato tatiyārūpenapi bhavitabbanti codanamanasi nidhāya pañcamyu dāharaṇeyeva kāraṇaṃ tatiyodāharaṇassa ca paṭhamodāharaṇānusārenānu mantabbatañcadassento āha ‘pañcamyāyevi’ccādi, abhāvena saṅkhāranirodhenāti tatiyantarūpāni.
22. 第六格(属格)。显示巴利原文
22. Chaṭṭhī
若有人难曰:“此处仅凭表达关系的意愿,第六格便应成立。”则说“于因义中”等以答。为明其因,说“彼相应性”等。所谓“音声能力”,即名为音声能力之能力,以“于何处”等阐明之。不与表达因义之词相接,此是关联。与同依止词——即与因义同依止的“腹”等词——相连,为令因义显明。以遮遣方式说明因义的生起:“然而于某处”等。以“于因义中”等显示其能力,例如“依法之因力”。显示巴利原文
Sambandhavacanicchāyevettha chaṭṭhī siddhāti āsaṅkiyāha-‘hetumhi’ccādi, hetumāha-‘taṃ yoggatā’ iccādi, saddasattisāmatthiyāti saddasattisaṅkhātāya sāmatthiyā, tameva phuṭayati ‘yattha’iccādinā, hetvatthavācakehi antarenāti sambandho, samānādhikaraṇehīti hetvatthasamānādhikaraṇehi udarādīhi, tajjotanāyāti hetvatthajotanāyālanti sambandho, byatirekena tu hetvatthato tappavattimāha-‘yattha pani’ccādi, hetvatthehipiccādinā sāmatthiyamupadassitaṃ ‘vase dhammassa hetuno’ti tatthodāharaṇaṃ.
“由成为名称者”:即于“一切”等中,若某些词是某些事物的名称,则依他们;“由成为非主要者”:即依“可爱”等“一切”词。“有何目的”等中的“目的”一词,据《尼汉陀》“目的有作用、因等义”,此处即作因义之说。显示巴利原文
Nāmabhūtehīti sabbādīsu keci kesañci yadi nāmāni siyuṃ tehi, appadhānabhūtehīti piyasabbādīhi, kimpayojanantiādo payojanasaddo ‘‘payojanaṃ kāriyahetūsu’’ti nighaṇḍuto hetuvacano.
无论是有心还是无心,若无恭敬与摄益之意,便不可能有正确的施与,因此说‘恭敬’等。由此,即依所述之义,‘布施支分’就是与施者的布施行为之业相连的布施之因。今欲显示有分类的与格之相,故说‘此则’等。‘遮止’即排除,‘令欢喜’即使之欢喜,‘允许’即同意,依这些义,此处即说为与格。那是什么呢?即是‘树、乞者、比丘’。为以分类显示树等与格,故说‘于此’等。或以请求、或以令欢喜而成与格,此是连接。或以认可、允许——虽存在而不遮止——即比丘的许可,依此意趣故说‘彼’等。显示巴利原文
Yassa sacetanāyācetanāya vā kassaci, pūjānuggahakāmatta mantarena sammāpadānaṃ na sambhavatīti āha-‘pūjā’ iccādi, tenāti yathāvuttenatthena, cāgaṅganti dadātino dānakiriyāya kammena sambajjhamānañcāgakāraṇaṃ, idāni sampadānalakkhaṇaṃ sappabhedamāvikātukāmo āha-‘tadida’miccādi, nanirākarotītya nirākaraṇaṃ, ārādhayatītyārādhanaṃ, abbhanujānātītyabbhanuññaṃ, tesaṃ vasena, idha sampadānantidhā vuttaṃ kathitaṃ, keteti āha-‘rukkhayācakabhikkhavo’ti, rukkhādikaṃ taṃ sampadānaṃ vibhāgena dassetumāha-‘tattha hi’ccādi, ajjhesanenārādhanena sampadānaṃ bhavatīti sambandho, anumatiyā abbhanujānena, vijjamānepyanirākaraṇe bhikkhuno-dhikamanumatantyadhippāyenāha-‘so’ iccādi.
当‘义’字用于目的之引申义时,此目的便可被指称,故说‘此之彼’等。此处以‘彼’字与变异体相连,而以‘义’字与本体相连。‘此是义之说明’,以此显示在此情形中并无构成复合词的意图。在分离句中,或应视为依这些词干而成立的固定复合词。彼即称为变异体之义,以本体性的词义而被统摄。由此‘彼义’一词,问:‘此彼义性是什么?’答:‘名为彼义性’等。相,即柱等变异体;有相者,即木等本体,以‘彼’字与‘义’字统摄之。它们之间的关系——即‘彼义’一词生起之因——名为‘彼义性’,此即是义。以因与有因的关系为特征,名为‘关系’,此即所说。从主要者的简别属性来说,即因被制定而成为主要者之人的简别、特殊属性。凡是被制定、被了知的,彼即是主要;次要者为非主要,因其随从而行。说‘当取用时’,为以实例阐明取用之方式,故说‘譬如’等。柱是相,彼木有此相,如是而说,而非他相。当以相之简别而取用时,则从‘相’一词即有第四格关系。从其他相而言,以相与有相者的关系现前,故于彼相中生起的,此即是关系。从‘相’一词,因格的第三格关系亦不应有疑,此亦是关系。说明其因:‘相’等。‘于两处’,即‘为柱’、‘为墙’这两处。显示巴利原文
Payojanapariyāye atthasadde sati idanti payojanaṃ parāmaṭṭhuṃ sakkāti ‘tasseda’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tasaddenettha vikatiyātisambandho, atthasaddena tu pakatiyā, attha kathanametanti iminā vacanicchāya metissaṃ natthi samāsoti dīpeti, viggahe vāsmimimasmāyeva nipātanā samāso daṭṭhabbo,so vikatisaṅkhāto attho, pakatitvaññapadatthenākkhipīyate, tato tadatthasaddato, koyaṃ tadattha bhāvo ccāha-‘tadatthabhāvo nāmā’tiādi, nimittaṃ yūpādivikati, nimittīdāruādipakati tasaddenātthasaddena ca gahitā, tesaṃ sambandho tadatthasaddassa pavattinimittaṃ tadatthabhāvo nāmāti attho, hetu hetumantabhāvalakkhaṇo sambandho nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti, padhānāvacchedaguṇasmāti vidhīyamānattena padhānassa purisassa ācchedakā visesakā guṇā, yañhi vidhīyate ñāpīyate tampadhāna, mitaramappadhānamanuvajjamānattā, yadā upādīyateti vatvā upādīyamānappakāraṃ diṭṭhantena phuṭayitumāha-‘yathā’iccādi, yūpo nimittaṃ yassa dāruno taṃ tathā vuttaṃ nāññanimittanti yadā nimityavacchedakattenupādīyate tadā nimittasaddatova catutthī sambandho, tato aññanimittato, nimittanimittīnaṃ sambandhassa abhimukhabhāvena tattheva nimitte pavattīti sambandho, nimittasaddato hetutatiyāpi nāsaṅkanīyāti sambandho, kāraṇamāha-‘nimitta’ iccādi. Ubhayatthāti yūpāya pākāyāti ubhayattha.
“被喜爱者”(piṇiyamāna)为何?所谓“声音等所可言说者”,即他人、甜美等义——那个意义是另一个作者,对此的欲求称为“他作者欲求”(aññakattukābhilāsa)。欲求即喜好(ruci)——以此说明,即使“ruci”一词有“给予”等多种意义,但在“欲求”义上约定俗成地被采用。那个喜好(ruci)是意义、所诠,对于以此为义者,即与此喜好相关之“被喜爱者”。以此也说明:虽然此喜好所生起者与彼喜好之生起者,两者都与“被喜爱者”有关,但喜好于谁生起,谁就是此喜好的所依(adhikaraṇa);即使非生起者,也以此喜好而相关联。因此,唯独“被喜爱者”被称为“与格”(sampadāna),而非以彼喜好相关联的生起者。此处(idha)以此显示所举例子的不同形式;并以此说明,正是由于例子的形式不同,才成为施设第四格(与格)的原因;否则,若以相同形式,则他们也会施设第六格(属格),因为缺乏原因。对于此类反例的存在,说出原因:“非他作者、作者之欲求”(anaññakattukattābhilāsassa)。他人的这个成为反例,在此如何?说“在此则……”(ihatvi)等。“tvaṃ”(你)一词,在仅表自性时即是第一格(主格)。在可能时,说出其他原因:“或者”(athavā)等。没有其他作者的那个喜好,称为“非他作者之喜好”(anaññakattukā ruci)。对于与喜好相关的“被喜爱者”,那些希望施设与格者——这是关联。而“那些又说”(ye pana āhu)也是关联。“生起”(uppajjana)即产生。什么的产生?喜好的产生。产生的依处称为“产生依处”(uppatyādhāra),如“对提婆达多喜欢”(devadattāya rocate)等,以提婆达多等为特征,故称为“产生依处的特征之语”(uppatyādhāropalakkhaṇaṃ vacanaṃ)。在此,应视为决定性的意义:即此语唯是喜好的产生依处之特征。因为一切语句都以决定为效果。由此,排除“被喜爱者之语并非以显示欲求的他作者性为目的”这一点。他们——即迦旃延的追随者们——在此也容许,这是关联。“在此也”(ihāpi)即在此“tvaṃ”一词中也。“由于以其他方式成立”(aññathāsiddhattā),即由于仅表自性的第一格已成立。“语”(vacanassa)即两者第四格施设之语。“会有过度应用之过失”(atippasaṅgo ca),即会导致“你对谁教示法?”(kassa vā tvaṃ dhammaṃ rocesi)等中,出现“tava”(你的)等不期望之处。显示巴利原文
Piṇiyamānā kiṃ saddādivacanīyā paro sāduādiko yo-ttho so añño kattā yassa so aññakattuko-bhilāso, abhilāso rucīti iminā dityādyanekatthantopi rucisaddo-bhilāse ruḷhova gayhatīti vadati, sā ruci attho-bhidheyyo yesaṃ bhe tadatthā, tesaṃ sambandhino piṇiyamānassa, iminā ca kiñcāpi rucirayaṃ yassuppajjateyo vā tassā janako, tesamubhinnampi atthi, tathāpi yassuppajjate sova tassādhikaraṇaṃ, ajanakopi so tāya saṃsattoti tasseva piṇiyamānassa sampadānasaññā, natujanakassa tāyāsaṃsattassāti dīpeti, idhāti iminā sakkate udāharaṇānamasamānarūpakaṃ dasseti, iminā ca udāharaṇānamasamāna rūpattameva catutthīvidhāne kāraṇaṃ, aññathā chaṭṭhīyeva tehipi vidhīyeyya kāraṇāsambhavā hi dīpeti, īdisassa paccudāharaṇa(ssa) bhāve kāraṇamāha-‘anaññakattu kattā-bhilāsassā’ti, paresamidampaccudāharaṇambhavatu idha kathanti āha-‘ihatvi’ccādi, tvanti attamatte paṭhamāyeva, sambhave kāraṇantaramāha-‘athavā’tiādi, natthi añño kattā yassā sā anaññakattukā ruci, bhāya ruciyā sambandhino piṇiyamānassa sampadānasaññaṃ ye pana icchantīti sambandho, ye pana āhu cātisambandho, uppajjanamuppatti, kassa uppatti, ruciyā, uppattiyā ādhāro uppatyādhāro‘devadattāya rocate’ccādo devadattādiṃ upalakkhetīti uppatyādhāropalakkhaṇaṃ vacanaṃ, ettha ruciyā uppatyādhāropalakkhaṇameva vacananti sāvadhāraṇa mattho daṭṭhabbo… sabbesaṃ vākyānamavadhāraṇaphalattā, tena piṇiya mānavacanamabhilāsassa aññakattukatāsandassanaparaṃ na hotīti byavacchinnambhavati, tesaṃ kaccāyanassa cehāpi pasajjatīti sambandho, ihāpīti tvamiti etthāpi, aññathāsiddhattāti atthamatte paṭhamāya eva siddhattā, vacanassāti ubhinnampi catutthīvidhānavacanassa, atippasaṅgocāti ‘‘kassa vā tvaṃ dhammaṃ rocesī’’tiādo tavāti anabhimataṭṭhānappattica.
“在持载的用法中”(dhārippayoge)即“dhāri”词根的用法中。“优者、劣者”(uttamīṇo adhamīṇo)是债主与负债者的惯用语,故说“优者是财主”。“他有优者”即“优者”(uttamīṇo)。“他持载”即说明其义为“他运载”。“被持载者”(dhārito)来自“dhāra”词根。以其他经句,对各个被规则所限定者施设了与格(sampadāna)后,由他人施设了第四格(与格)。故说“赞扬、杀、努力、饮”等。一切处在结合关系中为第六格(属格)。“为了告知”即为了使人了解赞扬等。“所欲者”即所尊重者。为了摄集表示彼义之词根,说“忿怒、挤奶、嫉妒、欲求义之……”(kudhaduhissosūyatthānaṃ)。以“对谁忿怒”说明忿怒的对境。以“对谁”指称前已说的“以何为作者”。以“对谁”指国王等。“他问”即被问。因此将说:“相师问与谁相关的善与不善”。“而凡随顺者生起”以此显示:“‘paṭi’前缀与‘ā’前缀的‘suṇāti’(听)用于允诺与承诺。当此允诺以希求为先时,则希求的作者——希求者——成为第四格形式;而当即使未被希求,仅见随顺而行,便允诺施物说‘我将给此此’时,则以随顺而行的行为之作者成为第四格形式。”以此指出波你尼注释者阇耶阿底耶的观点有过失。因为他认为:“所谓允诺,是对他人所希求者而有的,在此唯希求者成为第四格形式。”“先前行为的作者”即由吠陀语句所施设的、称为赞叹与许可之努力的前行行为之作者——呼召者与净化者。一切处,此“对此”应与“第四格所期望的形式”相关联。基于第六格遍行于一切,这是延伸适用,故说“如此”等。然而,由于形式相似及有“为此目的”的意义,随应地“为此目的之第四格”也不相违。因为将说:“若欲说为此目的之语……”等。“所欲的国王”“业之语欲”以此说明语欲的优先性。因为一切作者都面向语欲。“由于少用”即不多用。“杀”即除去。“近侍”即侍奉、前往。“羡慕”即希求。“忿怒”即作嗔恚。挤奶等由忿怒而生,无间而起,故也举出“dūbha”等例。“于辅音中长短……”(1-33)于短音有误失。“嫉妒”即不能忍受。“被问时,相师生气而审察”。“说明区分之义”以“对谁……”等。“审察”即观察。“什么特征”——说出此决定:“不必……”等。“唯从乞求者为第六格”意为不必是决定性的。从何而言?说“在关系中……”等。“也从其他”即也从非乞求者。“呼召者与净化者是赞叹行为的作者,成为努力与许可的业”故说“对‘paṭi’前缀的‘giṇāti’的业”。以“hotu, potu”等词,也显示了“potu”一词的第六格形式。但在注释中只见“hotu paṭigiṇāti”的读法。“hotu”如这些是我们所见的。“他努力”义中,“giṇāti”包含“听”义。“不责备”即不责备等所排除的。然而在此,虽无如此遮止,由于“多分”原则,有“我不认为那是船,我不认为那是食物”等。确实,由于“多分”原则,无过度应用之失。“认为这是第一格形式”即认为这是第一格形式。在此,当从草等也被轻视时,则了知责备。在此,必然地,否定词的使用因无理由而不适用,故举出带遮止的“不认为”。“唯在界限中为第五格”等。在否定词使用中,必然了知责备,故于“草等”唯是业,用第二格。或者,虽有了知责备,由语欲故,唯于自境用第二格。“在‘sammuti’的用法中”即“sammuti”一词的用法中。“他们希望第四格”即“以量”(mattāya)——在此希望第四格。对于重复,说出原因:“因为‘atha so’存在”。由于经中“暴恶之狗……”等有“atha so”的读法存在,故在“bhiyyoso mattāya”中,“so”音是重复——这是意旨。以“ca”的摄持,即“赞扬、杀……及于第七格义等”经中的“ca”字摄持,第四格被期望,即“namo 于瑜伽等中也……”的经。显示巴利原文
Dhārippayogeti dhāridhātuno payoge, uttamīṇo adhamīṇoti dhanikagahetūnaṃ ruḷhītyāha-‘uttamīṇo dhanasāmī’ti, uttamīṇamassāti uttamīṇo, dhārayatītimassatthamāha-‘vahatī’ti, dhāritoti dhāraṃdhātuto. Suttantarena (taṃ taṃ) niyamena niyamitānaṃ tesaṃtesaṃ sampadānasaññaṃ vidhāya catutthī vihitā parehi, tadāha ‘silāgha hanuṭṭhāsapāna’miccādi, sabbattha yogasambandhe chaṭṭhī, ñāpetunti silāghādike bodhetuṃ, icchitoti atimato. Tadatthavācīnañca dhātūnaṃ saṅgahaṇatthaṃ ‘kudhaduhissosūyatthāna’nti vuttaṃ, yampati kopoti iminā kopassa visayamāha, yassāti iminā yaṃkārakanti vuttameva parāmasati, yassāti rājādino, pucchatīti pucchiyate , teneva vakkhati-‘yassa sambandhiṃ subhāsubhaṃ pucchati nemittiko’ti, yocānukūlattambha jatīti iminā idaṃ dasseti ‘‘patipubbako āpubbakoca suṇoti abbhupagame paṭijānaneca vattate, yadāyamabbhupagamo patthanā pubbato bhavati tadā patthanāya kattu patthayituno catutthī rūpambhavati, yadātvapatthatampi kevalamānukūlyena vattamānaṃdisvā deyyamabbhupagacchanti idamidaṃ vodassāmāti tadānukūlyena pavattanasaṅkhātāya kiriyāya kattuno catutthīrūpambhavatī’’ti, iminā ca pāṇiniyavuttikārassa jayādiccassamate byabhicāramāha, so hi ‘‘abbhupagamo nāma parena patthitassa bhavati tattha patthayituyeva catutthīrūpambhavatī’’ti vadati, pubbassākiriyāya yo kattāti vedavākyena vihitathutikakaraṇa saṅkhātāya ussāhānujānanato pubbabhūtāya kiriyāya yo kattā hotā potā ca, sabbatthāpi‘tassā’ti idaṃ ‘catutthīyāyadabhimataṃ rūpa’ntiiminā sambandhitabbaṃ, chaṭṭhiyā sabbabyāpibhāvamālamba evanti atidesoti āha ‘evantī’tiādi, rūpasāmyato pana tādatthiyatthasabbhāvāca yathāyogaṃ tādatthha catutthīpi na virujjhati, vakkhati hi‘tādatthha vacanicchāyantu ‘iccādinā, icchito rājā, kamma vacanicchāti iminā vacanicchāya padhānattamāha… vacanicchābhimukhattā sabbesaṃ kārakānaṃ, appacurappayogattāti abahuppayogattā, hanute apanayati, upatiṭṭhate upaṭṭhānaṃ upagamanaṃ karoti, pihayanti patthenti, kujjha amarisaṃ karoti, duhanādayo kopappabhavā nānantarena te sambhavantīti dūbhādayopyudāhaṭā ‘‘byañjane dīgharassā’’ti (1-33) rasse aparajjhāmi, issayanti nasahanti, ārajjhati pucchito nemittiko upaparikkhati, bhādatthhaṃ vibhāveti ‘yasse’ccādinā, pariyā loceti upaparikkhati, kiṃ lakkhaṇo-yamaniyamoccāha-‘nāvassa’miccādi, yācitusmāyeva chaṭṭhīti nāvassamayanniyamoti attho, kutoccāha-‘sambandhe’ccādi, aññasmāpīti ayācitutoapi, thutikaraṇassa kattubhūtā hotāpotāro ussāhanānujānanānaṃ kammaṃ hotīti āha-‘paccanupubbassa giṇātissa kamme’ti. Hotupotusaddehiccādinā potusaddassapi chaṭṭhirūpaṃ dassitaṃ, vuttiyantu ‘hotu patigiṇāti’cceva pāṭho dissati, hotvevampityamhākamatropekkhā, ussāhayatītyatthe giṇāti antogataṇyattho. Anāvādoti nāvāannādivajjite. Ettha pana tathā paṭisedhābhāvepi bahulādhikārato ‘na taṃ nāvammaññe nataṃ annammaññe’ccādi bhavati, attheva hi bahulādhikāratovā tippasaṅgābhāvo, paṭhamantaṃ rūpanti maññamānoti paṭhamantaṃ rūpaṃ, etthaca yadā tiṇāditopi khikaṃsīyate tadā nindāvagamo, tattha ca niyogatova nañpayogo ñāthānupa pattiyāti sappaṭisedhamudāhaṭaṃ ‘na maññamāno’ti, avadhimhiyeva pañcamītiṇāti, nañpayogeva niyogato nindāvagamā tiṇanti kammeyeva dutiyā, athavā satīpi nindāvagame vacanicchāto savisayeyeva dutiyā, sammutippayogeti sammutisaddassa payoge, catutthiṃ icchantīti mattāyāti ettha catutthiṃ icchanti, puna ruttatte kāraṇamāha-‘atha sotivijjamānattā’ti, caṇḍassa kukkurassātiādisutte ‘‘atha so’’ti pāṭhassa vijjamānattā ‘bhiyyoso mattāyā’ti ettha sokāro punaruttoti adhippāyo, caggahaṇenāti ‘‘silāghahanu…pe… sattamyatthesucā’’ti sutte caggahaṇena, catutthībhimatāti ‘‘namo yogādisvapicā’’ti suttena.
所谓“限界”(avadhi),是指某事物由此而被限定、分离。它源自带有前缀“ava”的词根“dhā”,在“限界”一词中,依“dādhātvī”规则(5-45)而构成。显示巴利原文
Avadhīyate visilissate etasmātyavadhi, avapubbāya dhādhātuto avadhimhi‘‘dādhātvī’’ti (5-45) i.
所谓“限界”,是指任何事物从某处被限定,且以某种行为为先导。显示巴利原文
Yato-vadhīyate kiñci, kriyāpubbaṃ kutocipi;
智者把那能动的、不动的,以及其他种种,称为“限界”。
显示巴利原文 Calañcācalamaññañca, taṃ vadantya vadhimbudhā.
此处义旨为:“凡任何事物、任何对象,由某处因某种行为而先被限定——或为结合之因,或为行为之相,如行走、布施等行为先行,而后自行消散、自行离去,或由他者令其分离——智者即通达此义者,将此种能动的与不能动的、以分离为限界的词义,称为‘限界’。”例如:人在奔跑时自己跌倒,或使人跌倒;树叶从树上落下,或使树叶落下。此依所缘境之差别,亦说为三种,即:显示巴利原文
Etthāyamattho ‘‘yatokutocipi attho kiñci vatthuavadhīyate saṃyogassa vā kiriyānimittaṃ gamanadānādikiriyāpubbaṃ visilissate sayaṃ vā apeti aññena vā visuṃ karīyate, tamevaṃvidhaṃ calañcā calañca visilesaparicchedabhūtaṃ padatthamavadhiṃ vadanti budhā tabbiduno’’ti, taṃ yathā dhāvatāssā puriso patati, purisaṃ pāteti vā, rukkhā paṇṇaṃ patati, paṇṇaṃ pāteti vāti, soca tidhāpyuccate visayabhedena, yathā–
有所示现之境,有执取之境,
可推知境亦然,如是,三种限界已阐明。
显示巴利原文 Niddiṭṭhavisayo koci, upāttavisayo tathā; Anumeyyavisayo cāti, tidhāvadhi samīritoti.
其中,被陈述的、由言辞所引出的动作所涉及的范围,称为‘陈述范围’,如‘从村庄来’;被获取并引出的动作所涉及的范围,称为‘获取范围’,如‘云在闪电’,其义为‘云出来而闪电’;可推知的动作所涉及的范围,称为‘可推知范围’,如‘摩偷罗人比华氏城人更俊美’,此处由俊美之功德可推知超越。正因如此,此处唯有此想遍满而了知,并无任何令人迷惑的想在此被施设。若说‘从截断处’,则如何确定‘从词义截断处’?为遮止‘为何作如此解释’的疑虑,而说‘诸词’等。如‘从村庄’等,以此表明:‘并非唯有以身触为先的分离,而是也有以觉触为先的分离,且此处存在以觉触为先的分离。例如,因盗贼而恐惧等,凡有观察恐惧之习性者,他思惟:“若盗贼看见我,我必定死”,以觉触之,触已,即从彼处回转;同样,因盗贼而保护等,凡是一人之友者,他看见:“若盗贼看见此人,此人必定死”,以觉触之,即令其从彼处回转。’因此,一切处皆从截断处、从截断处而有第五格。然而,其他论师在如这些一切处,为摄持种种行相差别,唯以经而广说;此处则以总说即已成就,故为摄持彼,唯以诸例而广说。‘怖畏与保护之义’者,即怖畏与保护是他们之义,他们为怖畏保护义者,此为义。难道不是怖畏义之使用中,怖畏之因存在,而非保护义之使用中?此无过失,因为保护称为守护,而彼从怖畏之因生起,故说‘凡怖畏之因’等。以此亦遮破波你尼派‘怖畏义者,怖畏之因’(1-4-25)的夺格想之经。‘从彼’即从怖畏之因;‘他们’即怖畏与保护者;怖畏是对不可爱之发生的疑虑,即惊怖之义;保护是从不可爱之发生中完全守护。如‘为了有看见’等,以此表明说者之意图才是主要,因为谁能超越世间之说者意图呢?确实,一切事物等皆具一切作具能力,而此处作具之分别唯依说者之意图。例如:‘云在闪电’、‘云以闪电’、‘于云闪电’。以‘parā 前置’等,遮破‘parāji asayho’(1-4-26)之想经。‘asayho 义’即不能忍受、不能克服之义。以‘从学习、从亲近’等,为举例而说。难道如此说义时,说阐陀罗陀之不可克服,如何成为学习之不可克服,由此成立不可克服之截断处?为遮止此疑而说‘阐陀罗陀之不能克服’等。‘asayho’之反例,以‘然而凡’等成立。‘遮止义者,所欲’(1-4-27)为经所说,故说‘遮止义’等。遮止是他们之义,他们为遮止义者。‘唯截断量之说者意图中’者,即无特别施设而唯在截断量之说者意图中;‘于特别施设中’者,即所欲之特别施设中。然而,于心之截断说者意图中,亦成‘从心遮止恶’。‘保护义者,所欲’(2-6-3)为经所说,故说‘保护义’等。‘某些’者,指迦旃延等。‘于隐没中,凡不欲被见’(1-4-28)之想经已开始,故说‘于隐没中’等。‘若此和尚看见我’为关联。‘以“难道”等’思惟见之过患。派遣是以恭敬为先的任命,请求是以恭敬为先的。思惟着‘我作为弟子,如何成为被隔离者’者,隐没是以隔离为因,由此不欲自己被见,此为关联。‘于隐没中’是第七格表因,故说‘以隔离为因’。‘被隔离’即隐没。以‘和尚莫见我’等为例而说。‘为隔离义’即为被隔离之义。‘于隐没中,难道不欲见盗贼?’是其他论师所举的反例,为成立彼而说‘凡不欲被见’等。‘不欲见盗贼’,因为此处凡不欲见盗贼者,不欲自己被他们所见,故非以隐没为因,而是为回避伤害。‘而是为回避伤害’者,如此思惟:‘此处非唯隐没,而是以彼为因的伤害回避亦成,如“和尚隐没”,此处无伤害亦可能,唯成就隐没亦可能。’‘欲’之摄持有何用?为令虽无见之欲,于有见时亦得成立,如此说已,为成立彼而说:‘然而,虽无见之欲’等。‘虽于有见时’者,即虽和尚有见时。‘从彼’即从和尚。‘唯是截断之性’者,即和尚唯是截断之性。‘述说者,于使用中’(1-4-29)是他人之说,故说‘于使用中’等。以决定为先的明之把握,此处使用是所许。由使用言之能力,为明之把握,弟子行决定。‘从彼’即从述说者。‘生者之作者,本因’(1-4-30)之想经已作,故说‘生义者’等。生者之义为生义。何为彼生?‘从彼’即从生者作者之因。‘本因’一词,其他论师为令亦从‘子、喜悦生起’等之子等得成,而摄持唯因之量。因为因有二种:执取因与俱起因。其中,与果不异处者,如瓶之泥团是执取因;而彼之杖、轮等(与果异处者)是俱起因。于他们中,若此处摄持执取因,则唯于‘从角,声生起’等处得成,而非于‘子、喜悦生起’等处。‘于其他作具之说者意图中’者,此处应读为‘于其他作具等之说者意图中’……因此间亦有关联之说者意图中可能故。‘住于彼处者’即彼处住者,他们之。‘世间’即不异说者,世俗之人。‘于彼处有者’为世间者。‘非唯说者所系’者,即超越世间之说者意图,唯我如此说,以自意乐而说者是说者,不系属于彼,此为义。‘起源者,于有者’(1-4-31)为经所说,故说‘于有者’等。以‘最初可得’之义释,说此处生义不成立。因为雪山非恒河之因,彼恒河实由其他诸因而生起,唯于雪山最初可得。‘厌恶、远离、放逸义,应数数附说’(1-4-24或)已说,故说‘于远离义’等。然而,于厌恶、放逸义之根结合中,见业与处之说者意图,如此已说。然亦见截断之说者意图,如‘厌恶从恶’、‘从法放逸’等,亦因无遮止故有。‘与“他、远、方向、彼方”等词及“añc”后词结合时’(2-3-29)为经所说,故说‘与“他”词结合时’等。‘从彼’即从天授等。因其他论师解释‘“他”等义之摄持,由此于同义使用中亦成’,故说‘异于天授’。因‘远’词有遥远义,故‘从漏尽,远、遥远’之义被采用,故说‘“远”词是遥远义’。‘被指示之对偶者’者,即如‘天授是勇士’,凡被指示者,彼之第二者,彼为对偶者。因方向、处所、时间之词,以方向词性而摄持,故说‘与方向、处所、时间之词结合时’。‘先于正觉’等是时间词结合之例。‘añc’后词及‘āc’等词缀,此处未举。‘于第五格施设中,lyap 消失时,于业应数数附说’及‘于处亦应数数附说’(2-3-28或)为释补,故说‘凡处’等。lyap 词缀凡处不使用,而其义若被了知,彼即 lyap 消失;tvā 消失、lyap 消失,无差别。‘登宫殿而看’、‘坐于座而看’,此是‘有先前所见’之范围,即于动作差别之复合词。于将说之一切所见中,亦因有从宫殿出离之相,故宫殿唯以截断之性而转起,为示此而说‘确实’等。‘离去’即从彼处,彼之见离去,即从彼宫殿,彼观者之见、眼根离去、离开,此为义。‘宫殿之截断性’被了知。‘他们’即毗婆沙师等,他们如此说:‘于诸根中,眼根从眼珠以极微细之性而出,成为广大,至境之处,以全体见所见,如光之形;犹如螺贝,根部细,顶部大;智根等亦如是。’‘依止处’即作为根依止的眼珠之处。‘于境中转起’即于所缘中转起。‘以相续’即根之相续。‘依止不达根’为关联。‘从彼’即从宫殿。‘以离去’即以出离。虽然眼根从眼珠外出,然而,因从位于宫殿之眼珠外出,故宫殿亦有截断性。‘然而,他们’即刹那论者等。‘于根依止所缘时,以习性作识相之果者’为达已作者。‘非根依止之过’为关联。‘从彼’即从宫殿。‘然而,凡’者,亦指刹那论者。此处有四种主张:达已作之根、未达已作之根;眼耳未达已作,其余为所说之相反;唯眼达已作,其余不同。于四者中,举初二主张而成立……以彼之成立,其余亦成立故。‘一切宗义共通,声论之’者,此似不合理……因此声论有佛语之用,随顺佛教宗义而转起;然依刹那论者,此则善美。‘以作意等’者,以‘等’字示眼之无别及色现前之至。‘于相应处’即于见相应之处。‘于问与答中,第五格应说’(2-3-28或)已说,故说‘从问词’等。为示于问与答中总说第五格施设时之过广,而说‘必定’等。‘谁?’是问,‘天授’是答。‘谁有库藏?’是问,‘天授’是答。‘库藏,天授’是问,此为规则之形式;‘凡有臂钏’等是随说之形式的答。臂钏即臂环。‘从彼处,时间之量度,从彼第五格应说’(2-3-28或)已说,故说‘时间’等。‘被量度’即被限定,彼为量度,彼即量度。‘时间之第一格与第七格亦应说’(2-3-28)已说,此处此义为:‘彼相应’继续,彼相应之第五格义,于他之时间,第一格与第七格亦应说。‘从华氏城’是第五格相应。为示这些亦不应说,而说‘七由旬’等。因为此处,若欲说王舍城与由旬之无差别,则‘从华氏城,王舍城七由旬’;然于差别之说者意图中,以‘存在’等(2-34),第七格成就‘于七由旬中’。确实,从华氏城,于七由旬存在时,王舍城存在,此义被了知;七由旬相应之存在,成为王舍城存在之相。以‘于关系中,第六格’,以此遮破‘彼相应,于时间,第七格应说’(2-3-28或)之说。‘于作具,与少、难、苦、少等之非复数词’(2-3-33)为经所说,故说‘当’等。‘难等’者,以‘等’字摄少、苦、少等。‘非复数之形’即非实物之形。‘于功德,于因’者,即于功德词义之因中,‘于功德’(2-21)第五格,此为义。‘以如所说之施设’者,即以‘于功德’经中所说之施设。以‘当’等,示如他人,于作具别立施设无必要。‘应作之形之动摇’为关联。‘以同格性而为差别’为连结。‘以同格性’者,因见‘国王之人’等非同格亦为差别,故说。以同格性而为差别,且彼‘少’词,于具少功德之动摇中转起,唯是非复数词之差别,故彼说明:‘因少是业,于业第二格’。‘第五格’继续时,‘从远、近义,第六格或’(2-3-34)已说,故说‘从远、近义’等。‘以截断关系为相’者,即唯以截断关系为相、为因,他们第五格、第六格,他们如此说。‘欲转起’者,以此表明说者之意图才是主要。若如此,则于彼彼作具之说者意图中,其他格为何不应使用?故说‘而此处,世间之’等。此处,于诸格之决定中,唯世间之说者意图是系属、是因,此为义。‘第五格’继续时,‘从远、近义,第二格亦’(2-3-35)已说。‘第五格与于处亦’(2-3-36),此处以‘亦’字,从远、近义,第七格亦被《本经义摄》等论师所说。为举彼而遮破,以‘某些’等,如注释书中所说,为示彼而说‘某些,即《义摄》等’等。‘远、夺、处、洒’者,此为他们之遮破,是关联。然而,此处‘iti’词缺略。‘非因彼’等中,以‘彼’词,应知欲说非实物之远等。因为非彼被了知,非从彼被了知,非以彼被了知,非于彼中住立,应各别关联。‘且被了知’者,‘且’是应说之余之合集。‘由此’者,是当说之因之指归。‘yanti’是‘因何义’之不变化词。‘语作者’是婆罗卢支。‘从彼同格性’者,即从远等之同格性。‘从彼相应亦’者,即从远等相应之村等词亦。‘遮破’者,即遮破语作者之说。确实,此处《大疏》之文为:‘于从远、近义第五格施设中,彼相应之第五格遮止应说:远于村。于彼处亦见故,此遮止无义,因为于彼处亦见第五格。’显示巴利原文
Tattha niddiṭṭhā vacanopanītā kiriyā visayo yattha so niddiṭṭha visayo vadhi, yathā-‘gāmasmā āgato’ti, upāttājjhāhaṭā kiriyā visayo yattha so upāttavisayo, yathā-‘valāhakā vijjotate’ti, valāhakā nikkhamma vijjobhateti attho, anumeyyā kiriyā visayo yattha so anumeyyavisayo, yathā‘māthurā pāṭaliputtakehi abhirūpatarā’ti, ettha abhirūpaguṇena ukkaṃsanamanumeyyaṃ, atoyevetthāyameva saññā paripphuṭā viññāyatīti na kācidiha saññā paribhāsīyate byāmohakāriṇī, athāvadhismāti vuccamāne ‘padatthāvadhismā’ti kuto-vasīyate yenevaṃ vivaraṇaṃ katantyāsaṅkiyāha-padāna’miccādi. Yathā gāmasmātiādinā idaṃ dīpeti ‘‘na kevalaṃ kāyasaṃsaggapubbakova visileso, kiñcarahi buddhisaṃsaggapubbakopi, atthi ceha buddhisaṃsagga pubbako, tathāhi corehi bhāyatityādo yo (bhaya)pekkhaṇa sīlo bhavati, so yadi maṃ corā passeyyuṃ, dhuvaṃ me maraṇanti vicārento te buddhiyā pappoti pappuyya ca tato nivattate, tathā corehi tāyatityādo yo ekassa mitto bhavati so yadyetaṃ corā passeyyuṃ dhuvamassa maraṇanti passanto te buddhiyā patvā tato nivattayatītyavadhittā avadhismāva sabbattha pañcamī’’ti, parehi pana etādisesu sabbattha paṭipattuvisesānuggahāya sutteheva papañco kato, idha pana sāmaññavacaneneva siddhattā tadanuggahāya udāharaṇeheva papañcitaṃ, bhītibhāyanatthānanti bhīti tāyanānaṃ attho yesaṃ te bhītitāyanatthā tesanti attho, nanu bhītyatthānaṃ payoge bhayahetu sambhavati natu tāyanatthānanti, nesa doso, tāyanañhi rakkhanamuccate tañca bhayahetuto vetyāha-‘yo bhayahetu’tiādi, iminā ca ‘‘bhītyatthānaṃ bhayahetu’’ti (1-4-25) pāṇiniyānamapādānasaññā suttampaṭikkhipati, tatoti bhayahetuto, tesanti bhayatāyanānaṃ, bhayamaniṭṭhapātasaṅkā, uttāsotyattho, tāyana maniṭṭhapātato parirakkhanaṃ, yathā dassanaṃ hontevātīminā vacanicchāyeva padhānattamāha, ko hi lokiyaṃ vacanicchamativattituṃ sakkoti, tathāhi sabbeva dabbādayo sabbakārakasattiyuttāva, tatthāyaṃ kārakavibhāgo vacanicchāvaseneva, taṃ yathā ‘valāhako vijjotate, valāhakena vijjotate, valāhake vijjotate’ti. Parāpubbassātiādinā ‘‘parājissāsayho’’ti (1-4-26) saññāsuttaṃ paccakkhāti, asayho atthoti sahituṃ abhibhavitumasamattho attho, ajjhenasakāsāiccādinā udāharaṇatthamācikkhati, nanucevamatthaṃ vadatā yaññadattassāsayhattaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ ajjhayanassāsayhattaṃ, yenāsayhattassāvadhittaṃ paṭipādayati tyāsaṅkiyāha-‘yaññadattānabhibhavo’ccādi, asayhotīmassa paccudāharaṇaṃ paṭipādayati ‘yo pani’ccādi. ‘‘Vāraṇatthānamicchito’’ti (1-4-27) suttitaṃ, tadāha ‘vāraṇatthāna’miccādi, vāraṇamattho yesaṃ te vāraṇatthā, avadhimattavacanicchāyanti visesato vidhānamantarenā vadhimatta vacanicchāyaṃ, visesavidhāneti icchitoti visesavidhāne, cittassāvadhivacanicchāyampana cittato pāpaṃ nivārayeti bhavati. ‘‘Rakkhanatthānamicchita’’nti (2-6-3) suttitaṃ, tadāha-‘rakkhanatthāna’miccādi, kesañcīti kaccāyanādike dasseti. ‘‘Antaradhāne yenādassanamicchatī’’ti (1-4-28) saññāsuttamāraddhaṃ, tadāha-‘antaradhāne’ccādi, ayamupajjhāyo yadi maṃ passatīti sambandho, dassane dosaṃ takketi ‘nuna’miccādinā, pesanamasakkārapubbako niyogo, ajjhesanaṃ sakkārapubbako, maññamāno sissā ahaṃ kathannāma byavahito bhavāmīti antaradhāne byavadhāna nimittaṃ, yena attano adassanamicchatīti sambandho, antaradhāneti nimittasattamīcāyaṃ, ato āha-‘byavadhānanimitta’nti, byavahitoti antarahito, māmaṃ upajjhāyotyādinā udāharaṇatthamāha, byavadhānatthaṃ byavahitatthaṃ, ‘‘antaradhāneti kiṃ core na didikkhatī’’ti paccudāhaṭaṃ parehi, tampaṭipādayamāha-‘yatthādassana’miccādi, core na didikkhatī (tya), tra hi yo core na didikkhati tehi attano adassanamicchatīti na antaradhānanimittaṃ, kintupaghātanivatyatthaṃ, kintupaghātanivattiyāti evaṃ maññate ‘‘nātrāntaradhāname (vāvaseyaṃ), kintu tannimitto paghātanivattipi, ‘upajjhāyā antaradhāyatī’tyatra vināpyupaghātasambhavamantaradhānasampādanameva sambhavatī’’ti. Icchatiggahaṇaṃ kimatthaṃ adassanicchāyaṃ sati satyapi dassane yathāsiyā’’ti vuttaṃ, (taṃ) paṭipādayamāha-‘adassanicchāyampani’ccādi, satīpi dassaneti upajjhāyena dassane satīpi, tatoti upajjhāyato, avadhirūpatā evāti upajjhāyassāvadhirūpatā eva. ‘‘Ākhyāto payoge’’ti (1-4-29) paravacanaṃ, tadāha ‘upayoge’ccādi, niyamapubbakaṃ vijjāgahaṇamupayogo trādhippeto, upayogavacanasāmatthiyā vijjāgahaṇatthaṃ sissavattaṃ niyamo, tatoti ākhyātuto. ‘‘Janikattuno pakatī’’ti (1-4-30) saññāsuttaṃ kataṃ, tadāha-‘janyatthassā’tiādi, janino attho janyattho, kintaṃ jananaṃ, tatoti janikattuhetuto, pakatisaddena kāraṇamattaṃ gahitaṃparehi ‘puttā pamodā jāyate’ccādo puttāditopi yathā siyā’ti, duvidhaṃ (hi) kāraṇaṃ upādānakāraṇaṃ sahakārikāraṇañca, tattha kāriyenābhinnadeso ghaṭassa mattikāpiṇḍo upādānakāraṇaṃ, tasseva pana daṇḍacakkādi (kāriyena bhinnadeso) sahakārikāraṇaṃ, tesūpādānakāraṇasseha gahaṇe’siṅgā saro jāyate’ccatreva siyā, na tu ‘puttā pamodā jāyate’ccādo, kārakantaravacanicchāyanti ettha kārakantarādivacanicchāyanti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ… etthantare sambandha vacanicchāyapi sambhavato, tatra tiṭṭhantīti tatraṭṭhā, tesaṃ, loko-naññathāvādī vohārikajano, tattha bhavā lokiyā, navattu paṭibaddhāti lokavacanicchamullaṅgiya ahameva vadāmīti sakajjhāsayena vadanto vattā, tappaṭibaddhā na hotīti attho. ‘‘Pabhavo bhavatissā’’ti (1-4-31) suttitaṃ, tadāha-‘bhavatissā’tiādi, paṭhamato upalabbhatīti atthakathanena janyattho-tra na sambhavatīti vadati, nahi himavā gaṅgāya kāraṇaṃ, sā hi aññehi evakāraṇehi uppannā , himavati tu kevalaṃ paṭhamato upalabbhati. ‘‘Jigucchāvirāmapamādatthānumupasaṅkhyānaṃ’’ti (1-4-24vā) vuttaṃ, tadāha-‘viramaṇatthe’tyādi, jigucchāpamādatthadhātuyoge pana kammādhikaraṇavacanicchā dissatīti vuttaṃ, avadhivacanicchāpi pana dissake ‘jigucchati nāhiriko pāpā’ti, dhammā pamajjatītipi hoteva paṭisedhābhāvā. ‘‘Aññārāditararite disāsaddāñcuttarapadācāhi yutte’’ti (2-3-29) suttitaṃ, tadāha-‘aññasaddayoge’ccādi, yatoti devadattādito, ‘‘aññaityatthaggahaṇaṃ, tena pariyāyappayogepi bhavatī’’ti aññehi byākhyātattā āha-‘bhinno devadattā’ti, ārāsaddassa dūratthattā āsavakkhayato ārā dūro bhavatī(tyattho u) pādīyatetyāha‘ārāsaddo dūrattho’ti, niddissamānapaṭiyogīti ‘devadatto sūro’ti niddissamānassa kassaci yo so dutiyo, so paṭiyogī. Disādesakālavuttīnaṃ disāsaddattena pariggahato āha‘disā desakālavācīnaṃ yoge’ti, pubbeva sambodhātiādīni kālavācīyoge udāharaṇāni, añcuttarapadaācaāhipaccayayo getviha nodāhaṭaṃ. ‘‘Pañcamīvidhāne lyaplope kammanyupasaṅkhyānaṃ ‘‘adhikaraṇe copasaṅkhyāna’’miti (2-3-28-vā) vāttikaṃ, tadāha‘yattha’ccādi, lyappaccayassa yatrāppayogo, tassattho ce gamyate, so lyaplopo, tvālopo lyapalopotyaviseso, pāsāda māruyha pekkhati āsane upavisitvā pekkhatīti idaṃ visayo padassanaṃ pubbaṃ yassāti kiriyāvisesane samāso, vakkhamānasabbadassanesupi pāsādato-pakkamanalesasabbhāvā pāsādo (yevā) vadhirūpena vattumiṭṭhoti dassetumāha-‘tathāhi’ccādi, apakkamati tato taṃ dassananti tato pāsādato tassa daṭṭhuno dassanaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ apakkamatyapayātītyattho, avadhibhāvo pāsādassāti viññāyati, yesanti vesesikānaṃ, te hyevamācikkhanti ‘‘indriyesu cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhugoḷakato-ccantasukhumabhāvena nikkhamma visālībhavantaṃ visayadesamupagamma sakalamattanā diṭṭhaṃ passati raṃsirūpena, yathā kāhalā mūle kisā aggemahatī, tathā ñāṇindriyānī’’ti, adhiṭṭhānadesanti indriyādhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ cakkhugoḷakadesaṃ, visayappavattīti gocare pavatti, santatiyāti indriyapabandhassa, adhiṭṭhāna manindriyaṃ nāpajjateti sambandho, tatoti pāsādato, apakkantyāti apagamanena, yajjapi cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhugoḷakato bahi niggacchati, tathāpipāsādaṭṭhassacakkhugoḷakā niggacchatīti pāsādassāpyavadhibhāvo, yesantūti khaṇikavādīnantu, indriyādhiṭṭhānampatte visaye viññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ kāriyaṃ karonti sīlenāti pattakārīni, anindriyādhiṭṭhānadoso neti sambandho, tatoti pāsādato, yesampanāti khaṇikavādinova dasseti, atra hi cattāro pakkhā pattakārīnindriyāni, appattakārīni, cakkhusotāni appattakārīni sesāni vuttaviparitāni, cakkhuyeva pattakārī sesamaññatheti, catusveva tesu paṭhamapakkhadvayamupanyasya paṭipāditaṃ… tappaṭipādanenetaresampi paṭipāditattā, sabbasāmayikasādhāraṇattāsaddasatthassāti idaṃ ayuttamiva dissati… saddasatthassimassa buddhavacanopayogittena sogatasamayānuguṇappavattito, khaṇikavādino pana nissāyedaṃ sundarameva, manasikārādītiādisaddena cakkhuto abhedo rūpāpāthagamo ca dassito, yoggadeseti dassanayogge padese. ‘‘Pucchanākhyānesu ca pañcamī vattabbā’’ti (2-3-28vā) vuttaṃ, tadāha-‘pucchanasaddato’ccādi, pucchanākhyānesu sāmaññena pañcamīvidhāne-tippasaṅgaṃ dassetumāha-‘avassa’miccādi, kassāti pañho, devadattassetyākhyānaṃ, koso yañña dattoti pañho vidhirūpovāyaṃ, yo-ṅgadītyādyanuvādarūpamākhyānaṃ, aṅgadīkeyūrī. ‘‘Yatocāddhakālanimmānaṃ tato pañcamī vattabbā’’ti (2-3-28vā) vuttaṃ, tadāha-‘addha’ccādi, nimīyate paricchijjate yena taṃ nimānaṃ, tadeva nimmānaṃ. ‘‘Addhassa paṭhamā sattamī ca vattabbā’’ti (2-3-28) vuttaṃ, tatthāyamattho ‘‘taṃ yuttāti vattate, taṃ yuttā pañcamiyutthā parassāddhassa paṭhamā ca sattamī ca vattabbā’’ti, pāṭaliputtasmāti pañcami yuttaṃ, etāpi na vattabbāti dassetumāha-‘sattayojanānī’tiādi, atra hi yadā rājagahassa yojanañcābhedo vattumicchīyate, tadā pāṭaliputtasmā rājagahaṃ sattayojanānīti, bhedavacanicchāyantu ‘‘sabbhāvo’’tyādinā (2-34) sattamī siddhā‘sattasu yojanesu’ti. Tathāhi pāṭaliputtasmā sattasu yojanesu sati rājagahaṃbhavatītyayamattho patīyate, sattayojanasambandhibhavanaṃ rājagaha (bhavana)ssa lakkhaṇambhavati. Sambandhe chaṭṭhīti iminā ‘‘taṃ yuttā kāle sattamī vattabbā’’ti (2-3-28vā) vacanampaṭikkhipati. ‘‘Karaṇeca thokappakicchakatipayassā sattavacanasse’’ti (2-3-33) suttitaṃ, tadāha-‘yadā iccādi, kicchādayotiādisaddena thokaappakatipaye saṅgaṇhāti, asattarūpanti addabbarūpaṃ, guṇe hetumhīti guṇapadatthe hetubhūte ‘‘guṇe’’ti (2-21) pañcamīti attho, yathāvuttavidhāneneti ‘‘guṇe’’ti sutte vuttavidhānena, ‘‘guṇe’’ti sutte vuttavidhānena, yadātviccādinā paresaṃ viya karaṇe visuṃ vidhāne payojanaṃ natthīti dasseti. Kattabbarūpassa calanassāti sambandho, samānādhikaraṇattena visesananti yojanā, samānādhikaraṇattenāti ca ‘rañño puriso’tyādo asamānādhikaraṇassāpi visesanattadassanato vuttaṃ, samānādhikaraṇattena visesanabhāvo cāssa thokaguṇānvite calane vattamāno thokasaddo asattavacanova visesananti, tenevākhyāyate ‘thokassa kammattā kamme dutiyā’ti. Pañcamītyanuvattamāne ‘‘dūrantikatthehi chaṭṭhī vā’’ti (2-3-34) vuttaṃ, tadāha‘dūranti katthehi’ccādi, avadhisambandhalakkhaṇāti avadhisambandhāva lakkhaṇaṃ nimittamāsaṃ pañcamīchaṭṭhīnaṃ tā tathā vuttā, vattumiṭṭhoti iminā vacanicchāyeva padhānattamāha, evaṃ carahi taṃtaṃ kārakavacanicchāyamaññāpi vibhattiyo kasmā nappayujjeyyunti āha-‘lokiyā cetthā’tiādi, ettha vibhattīnaṃ niyame lokiyā eva vacanicchā nibandhanaṃ kāraṇanti attho, pañcamīcātyanuvattamāne ‘‘dūranti katthehi dutiyā ce’’ti (2-3-35) vuttaṃ, ‘‘pañcamyadhikaraṇeca’’ (2-3-36) iccatra ca kārena dūranti katthehi sattamī ca vuttā pāṭi padikatthe sārasaṅgahakārādīhi, tadakkhippa aññāpadesena paṭikkhipituṃ kecityādi yaṃ vuttaṃ vuttiyaṃ, taṃ dassetumāha’kecīti sārasaṅgahādayo’tiādi. Dūrāpādāvasecananti ayaṃ tesampaṭikkhepana yoti sambandho, itisaddo panettha parihīno, nahitantiādīsu tasaddenāsattarūpaṃ dūrādi vattumicchitantyavaseyaṃ, na hi taṃ gamyate, na hi tato gamyate, na hi tena gamyate, na hi tasmiṃ ṭhīyate’ti visuṃ sambandho vaseyo. Patīyantecāti co vattabbantarasamuccaye, atoceti vakkhamānahetuparāmāso, yanti yasmā atthe nipāto, vākyakāro vararuci, taṃsāmānādhikaraṇyatoti dūrādisā mānādhikaraṇyato, taṃyuttatopīti dūrādiyuttā gāmādisaddatopi, paccakkhantoti vākyakāravacanaṃ paccācikkhanto, tathāhyatrāyaṃ mahābhāssa pāṭho ‘‘dūrantikatthehi pañcamīvidhāne taṃyuttā pañcamīpaṭisedho vattabbo dūrā gāmassa, tatrāpi dassanā anatthako-yampaṭisedho, tatrāpi hi pañcamī dissati–
因导师而忿怒者为远,应被带来者亦为远,以及因盗贼而为远。
显示巴利原文 Dūrasmāvasathā muttaṃ, dūrāpādāvasecanaṃ; Guruto kupitā dūrā,bhābyaṃ dūrā ca dassuhiti.
此处,“远、近”等是应宣说的句法表述,“远离村庄”是其示例,其中“等”字为遮遣之说。“远离住所”意为“住所之远处”,此义在《语灯》中由Keyyaṭa解说。凡是第一人,他即成为第一人,如“远、近”等(2-6-5),在《迦旃延经》中亦包含了纯粹等之结合,故说“纯粹、解脱、远离、量之结合”。又因“于界、名、前缀结合等中亦”此经(2-6-2)中取用了“ca”字,故也摄取了“从……起”之结合,故说“于从……起之结合中亦”。以此“于从……起之结合中亦”,也包含了从……起之义之结合,正因如此,才举出“自从我忆念自己”为例。显示巴利原文
Atra dūrantiketyādi vattabbaṃ vākyakāravacanaṃ, dūrā gāmassāti tassodāharaṇaṃ, tatrāpiccādi paccakkhānabhāssaṃ, dūrasmāvasathāti āvasathassa dūreti atthohi bhāssapadīpe keyyaṭo, paṭhamo puriso yassa so paṭhamapuriso bhavati ‘‘dūrantikā’’di (2-6-5) kaccāyanasutte suddhādiyogopi saṅgahito, tenāha–‘suddhappa mocanavivittappamāṇayoge’ti, ‘‘dhātunāmānamupasaggayogādīsvapica’’ iti (2-6-2) sutte caggahaṇato pabhutiyogo ca gahito, tenāha–‘pabhuti yogecā’ti, pabhutiyogecāti iminā pabhutyatthayogopi saṅgahito, teneva ‘yatosarāmi attāna’nti udāhaṭaṃ.
难道他们与厅堂等的结合不是显而易见的吗?为何此处还有疑问?“与谁有这些结合?”——为消除此疑虑,说道:“遮止”等。“vajjanāna”是于作者(kattari)的“ana”(后缀),即“在遮止”;“在名为遮止的关系中运作的”,即“在名为遮止的关系中运作的apa、pari(前缀)”。“从结合者”,即从单一的结合者本身,而非从其他。“在此有何可说?”——以此表明,从与apa、pari结合者本身,第五格(从格)的成立是众所周知的。为举出并阐明这众所周知之理,说:“作者”等。“yadattho”:凡是厅堂等义为某遮止行为之目的者,彼即“yadattho”。虽在“与apa、pari结合时用第五格”(2-3-10)中已作规定,但与其他(前缀)结合时也规定第五格,故说:“界限”等。在此,“降雨”有其界限。显示巴利原文
Nanu phuṭova tesaṃ sālādīnaṃ yogoti kimettha pañhena kassa panetehi yogo’tyāsaṅkiyāha-‘vajjanaṃ hiccādi, vajjanānanti kattari ano, vajjane sambandhe vattamānehīti vajjanasaṅkhāte sambandhe vatta mānehi apaparīhi, yuttasmāti yuttatova ekasmā, nāññato, kimettha vattabbanti iminā apaparīhi yuttasmāva pañcamībhavane pasiddhattamāha, pasiddhampetamāharitvā pakāsetumāha-‘kattuno’ccādi, yadatthoti yosālādi attho payojanaṃ yassa vajjanakiriyā rambhassa so yadattho. ‘‘Pañcamyapāparīhī’’ti (2-3-10) āyuttepi pañcamī vidhīyate parehi, tadāha-‘mariyādāya’miccādi, avadhimā ettha vassanaṃ.
“已见关联的”:即依公认之理,已见所作之因的心要。“彼之果义”:即彼心要之果;为达此果而作,此义已说。“在彼替代中运作的”与“送去”相关联。“交换”即回转之相,“于回赠中”亦应视为词之多义运用。“与彼结合”即关联。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhasambandhassāti pasiddhavasena diṭṭhakāriyakāraṇassa mukhyassa, tassa kāriyatthanti tassa mukhyassa yaṃ kāriyaṃ, tadatthaṃ mukhyakāriya karaṇatthanti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ paṭinidhimhi vattamānena pabhineti sambandho, vinimayeti parivattana nimittaṃ paṭidānecāti ca saddassāṭṭhānappayutti daṭṭhabbā, patinā tassa yogoti sambandho.
如果因为是被遮止行为所关联的业,所以在业中应用第二格,那为何还要再说第二格呢?为此说:“于直示规则中”等。“paṭipadavidhānā”:其规则是直接宣说的,即直示规则,意为特殊规则。如果此处没有第二格之说,那么在与“rite”一词结合时,直接规定的第五格就会排斥第二格——有人这样认为。若此处目的只为令第五格不被第二格排斥,就应说“rite vā”(或与rite结合时),这样在另一情况下也会有第二格,且经文更为简短。为断此疑,说另一目的:“为后文故”等。“atoyeva”:正因是为后文故。再为显示取第二格的另一目的,说:“于其他格”等。“āhaccavacanaṃ”:撞击喉等处以风击出而说之语,即直接之言,此谓直说。“其他格”即第六格,为了排斥它,即为了排除它。“其他”:除了第二格,其他如第六格等亦属其中。与所论第五格的关联义,即是“所论关联义”。显示巴利原文
Yadi vajjanakiriyāya sambajjhamānassa kammattā kamme dutiyā, kimatthaṃ carahi puna dutiyāvacananti āha-‘paṭipadavidhāne’ccādi, paṭipadaṃ ujukamevoccāritaṃ vidhānaṃ yassā sā paṭipadavidhānā, visesavidhāna vatītyattho, yajjatra dutiyāvacanaṃ na siyā tadā ritesaddena yoge ujukaṃ vidhīyamānāya pañcamiyā dutiyā bādhīyethāti maññate. Yadyatra pañcamiyā dutiyāya bādhābhāvo eva payojanaṃ, evañcarahi ‘rite vā’ti suttayitabbaṃ evaṃ sati pakkhe dutiyā ca bhavissati, lahu ca suttampaṇītambhavatī tyāsaṅkiya payojanantaramāha-‘uttaratthañce’ti, atoyevāti uttaratthattāyeva, puna payojanantaraṃdutiyā gahaṇassa dassayamāha-‘vibhatyantare’ccādi, āhacca kaṇṭhādiṭṭhāne vāyunāāhanitvā āharitvā vā vacanaṃ āhaccavacanaṃ, ujukavacananti vuttaṃ hoti, vibhatyantaraṃ chaṭṭhīvibhatti, tassa byudāsatthaṃ, nirāsatthantuttho, aññāpīti dutiyāya aññā chaṭṭhīpi, pakatāya pañcamiyā sambandhanattho pakatasambandhanattho.
有人这样认为:并非第二格也依结合分别而有。即:“于‘第三格且’(tatiyā ce)此语持续时,若以‘ca’字连接‘第二格且’(dutiyā ce),那么此处也因‘ca’字而有第五格,如此便不会减损任何一方的意义。因此,不将‘与vinā、aññatra、puthu、nānā结合时用第三格且’合为一则,而是依结合分别之力,由‘第三格且’中的‘ca’字,有时也成就第五格。”在无同伴之义时,为何不直接说“于vinā义中”,而要分别造颂呢?为此而说:“分别是为了不忽略”等。显示巴利原文
Na dutiyāpi yogavibhāgatoti evaṃ maññate ‘‘tatiyā ceti vattamāne tattha yadi cakārena ‘dutiyā ce’ti sambandhīyeyya, tatrāpi ca kārena pañcamītyevaṃ na kassāpyapakaṃsoti‘vināññatraputhanānāhi tatiyā ce’tyekayogamakatvā yogavibhāgasāmatthiyā ‘tatiyā ce’ti ca kārena jātu pañcamī’’ti, asahāyatthatte sati ‘vinātthe hī’tyevamavatvā kiṃ visuṃ suttaracanāyetyāha-‘bhedo pādānantvi’ccādi.
对于“凡声音之常住与连接处,即最究竟之所在”一句,“yoti”(彼)指示了“tassāti”(它的);而“yo yattheti”等词语,如疏释“以行为为所依”等文所解,意为“yoti”指行为之所依(kiriyādheyyabhūta),世尊正是针对此而说“kiriyā ca”等。因此,此处的“ādhārīyati”(被依止)应作如是解:在“行为与作者、业相俱”之处,或者依止于作者,故应于作者处作复合词解;又或者“作者与业为行为依止的所依,它执持此”,故于作者处作复合词。因为经中说——显示巴利原文
Yantaṃ saddānaṃ niccattā sambandhassa yatthāti parāmaṭṭhaṃ soti, yoti parāmaṭṭhaṃ tassāti ca niddisati, yo yatthetyādikañca ‘kiriyādhārabhūte’ccādivuttigantha vivaraṇanti yoti kiriyādheyyabhūtādhippetā, etanevāha‘kiriyā cā’tiādi, tenāyamādhārīyati kattukamma samavetā kiriyāsmintyadhikaraṇe vā taṃ ādhārayatīti kattari vā ghaṇantena daṭṭhabbo, kattāraṃ kammañca kiriyānissayabhūtamādhāra yatītyādhāroti vā kattari ghaṇa, vuttaṃ hi–
依止作者、并以业为行为之所依者;
彼即称为所依与作者,此实唯四种。
显示巴利原文 Ādhārayati yo kattu, kammaṃ kiriyanissayaṃ; Ādhāraṃ kārakañcāhu, taṃ catubbidhameva ceti.
有人问:“既然说因执持行为而名为‘所依’,为何又这样说?”这并没有过失。因为所谓执持行为,正是以作者与业作为它们的基础而加以执持;离开了前者,便不可能有那种执持。因此,正是由于行为的原因,以执持而说为所依,这个意义必定如此。所依并不是舍弃作者与业而直接执取行为,所以下文将会说“行为所依”等。如果有人问:“如果作者直接执持与自己相伴的行为,而与业相伴的种种动作又直接执持业……若是这样,它们就成了所依。”并非如此。因为在世间和圣教中,若不依于它们作为作者与业的身份,便不可能被信受理解。正是为了说明只有以作者与业的身份才能被信受,所以说“若有行为”等,又说——显示巴利原文
Nanu ca kiriyādhāraṇenādhārotyuccate, taṃ kimevamuccateti ce, nesadoso yadeva hi kiriyādhāraṇamassa, tantannissayabhūta kattukammadhāraṇaṃ, nahyaññatā taddhāraṇaṃ sambhavati tato kiriyā kāraṇenādhāraṇenādhārotya yamevattho, na kattukammapariccāgenādhārena ujukaṃ kiriyā gayhate, teneva vakkhati-‘kiriyāyayo ādhāro’ccādi, nanu yadyapyujukameva kiriyaṃ dhārayati kattā kattusamavāyiniṃ, kammasamavetañca viktedanādiṃ kiriyaṃ kammaṃ… tathā sati tānevādhāroti, na… loke satthe ca tesamādhāratthe nāppatītito, kattukammatāyeva hi tesampatītīti dassetumāha-‘kiriyā ce’tyādi, tathā ca vuttaṃ–
但随顺传承,执持作者与业所限定之行,
且资助行为成就者,于圣典中即说为依止。
显示巴利原文 Kattukamma byavahitaṃ, dhārentamanuju kriyaṃ; Kriyāsiddhupakāri ca, satthe-dhikaraṇaṃ matanti.
“由作者与业所限定”,即依作者与业,通过与之共俱的关系而限定。“随顺”,即依其传承。“助成行为之成就”,即对于与作者、业共俱的行为所成就之事,作其助益者。对此,有诘难言:“此所依并非仅由执持行为而得名,亦可由执持作者与业而确定为所依。”为回应此难,故说“若不”等句。“仅是行为的相状”,即仅是与作者、业共俱之行为的相状。为显示此所依有四种,故说“此依止”等语。“有四种差别”,即指这四种。“有所依的贴合,即有结合的相状”——此是贴合依止,如“坐于床,煮于锅”等句中的床等。即床执持与天授共俱的坐这一行为,因而执持天授,为天授所限定;同样,锅执持与米共俱的润湿等行为,因而执持米。如此,床等即是贴合依止。“所依之外,所依处全不存在,或非全存在于所依之外”,此为领域依止。领域即是所依处,与所依无有异体。如眼等根取境而转,离开眼等则无色等认识对象,故色等称为眼等之领域;又如空中之鸟等,离开鸟等则无空,故空为鸟等之领域。领域即是领域依止。“所依与所依处互相遍满,所依处即是遍满依止”。如说“胡麻中有油,酪中有酥”,此处胡麻等遍满于油等所依处而安住,故胡麻等为遍满依止。“存在即为邻近,邻近即是邻近依止”,此为所依处存在于邻近的关系。显示巴利原文
Kattukammabyavahitanti kattukammehi taṃsamavetabhāvena byavahitaṃ, anuju pārampariyena, kriyāsiddhupakāriti kattukammasamavetāya kiriyāya pasiddhiyaṃ upakārī upakubbantaṃ, nanu ca na kiriyā dhāraṇenevāyamādhāro, kattukammānaṃ dhāraṇenāpyādhāroti sakkā vavatthapetunti codanammanasi nidhāyāha-‘na ce’tyādi, kiriyā nimittassevāti kattukammasamavāyiniyā kiriyāya nimittasseva, tadevaṃvidhamādhāraṃ catubbidhammatanti dassetumāha-‘ādhāro cāya’miccādi, cattāro vidhāpakārā assāti catubbidho, ādheyyena sahopasileso saṃyogalakkhaṇo-ssa atthīti opasilesiko ādhāro-‘kaṭenisīdati thāliyaṃ pacati’tyādo kaṭādi, tathāhi devadattasamavetaṃ nisīdanakiriyaṃ kaṭo devadattaṃ dhārayaṃ dhārayati devadattabyavahitaṃ, evaṃ thālīpi taṇḍulasamavetaṃ vikledanādikiriyaṃ taṇḍule dhārayaṃ dhārayatītyopasilesikādhārattaṃ kaṭādino. Yato-ññatrādheyyaṃ na vattate sabbathā bhiyyo vā, so vesayiko, visayohyādheyyassānaññatrabhāvo, yathā cakkhādippavattīnamaññatrābhāvā cakkhādīnaṃ rūpādayo visayāti vuccante, evamākāse sakunayotyādo sakunyādīnamākāsādito-ññatrābhāvāte tesaṃ visayātyuccante, visayo eva vesayiko. Yo ādhārādheyyānamabhibyāpetyādheyyamityabhibyāpako, tathā hi‘tilesu telaṃ, dadhimhi sappi,tyatra tilādikaṃ telādikamādheyyaṃ byāpetvā tiṭṭhatīti tilādi byāpakādhāro. Samīpe bhavo, samīpo eva vā sāmīpiko, yassa samīpadese ādheyyaṃ vattate so evamuccate, atrodāharaṇaṃ ‘gurūsu vasati gaṅgāyaṃ ghoso’ti. Nanu cātrāpyādhāre sattamī vidhīyate ādhāro ca nissayo vuccate, nissayo ca saṃyogasamavāyehi hoti, na ca sissādīnaṃ guruppabhutīti devadattasakunyādīnamiva kaṭākāsādīhi saṃyogo, telādīnamiva ca tilādīhi samavāyo vā atthi, tenāyuttaṃ te samādhārattanti, netadatthi, yadāyattā hi yassa ṭhiti so vināpi saṃyogasamavāyehi tassa nissayo bhavati, tathāhi purisassa na raññā saha saṃyogosamavāyo vātthi, atha pana tadadhīnaṭṭhitittā rājanissayo purisoti byapadissīyate, sissādīnañca guruppabhutina māyattā ṭhitīti tesamayaṃ yutto guruppabhutinaṃ nissayabhāvoti, ettha pana yajjapi vesayikābhibyapakānamādhārādheyyopasileso atthi, tathāpi pakārantarasseva paripphuṭattā tatheva vacanicchā, nāññathā opasilesikena vā visayābhibyāpakānamaggahaṇato upasilesasse vā paribyattattā tatheva vohāroti na saṅkaro saṅkanīyoti.
由此“仅是相的状态”一语,说明即使没有与业的结合,第七格也能成立,并非如其他人所主张的那样,仅在业结合时才能成立。因此下文将说“如是了知”等。因为外道有“相由业”的经文,其含义是:因为与业结合,第七格才具有意义。例如,“为皮而猎豹”一句中,猎豹是以豹皮为目的;此处的“猎豹”即是表示业的词语。在经文中,正是为了显示这种表业词语的意义,才从“若非”等句开始阐述。显示巴利原文
Nimittabhāvamattetīminā kammasaṃyogābhāvepi sattamiyā pavatti māha, na paresaṃ viya kammasaṃyoge eva, teneva vakkhati-‘evamaññate’ccādi, bāhirānaṃ hi-‘nimittā kammena’’ (caṃ, 2-1-89) iti suttaṃ, tattha kammena yoge payojanā sattamībhavatītyattho, ajinamhi haññate dīpītidīpinohananassa payojanaṃ cammaṃ, tassa dīpinaṃhantīti kammena yo go, sutte kammenātyavacane payojanaṃ vattumārabhate ‘na pane’ccādi.
34. Yabbhā(由……)显示巴利原文
34. Yabbhā
“yassa kiriyā”,即属于牛等事物的挤乳等行为;“kiriyantarassa”,即行走等其他行为。“etenāti”,即以此作为相状。“tato-ccassa”,其解释说,即“以行为故”。在迦旃延文法中有“于时、于状态中”的经句,故此处说“于时义等”。显示巴利原文
Yassa kiriyāti yassa gavādyatthassa sambandhinī dohanādikiriyā, kiriyantarassāti gamanādikiriyantarassa, etenāti lakkhaṇanti etena, tato-ccassa vivaraṇaṃ kiriyāvatāti, ‘‘kālabhāvesu ce’’ti (2-6-43) kaccāyanehi suttitaṃ, tadāha-‘kālatthehi cā’tiādi.
在“有贪染”等场合,第六格与第七格应如何成立?从“以有贪染者、增上者、给予者、证人、担保人、儿子等”(2-3-39)开始,由其他论师提出。对此,他说“主人”等。在此,胜者觉音论师引用了“为使‘主人’等词不因拆分而转为其他同义语,在此不应说‘村子的国王’”这一语句,指出其合理性后,说“有贪染者”等。被什么所遮止?意思是:不被任何事物遮止。在表达所缘境的意欲时,也应有“在村子里是国王”这样的说法,以此来说明。从“以差遣者、善巧者而有亲近”(2-3-40)开始,对此他说“差遣者”等。漏是指专注于此,忙碌是指被差遣。在此可能有这样的疑问:“我将说‘由于亲近’等,因此必须引出此语;否则,即便只是稍有牵连,也会出现‘牛被差遣于车’这样的过失。”为了表明即使没有此过失,也没有这种必要,他说“即使没有”等。“有贪染者”等是迦旃延的经文。因此,在迦旃延经中,紧接“生起之声”之后,正是以“善巧之声”的说明来阐述;在此,是指莫嘎喇那的注释。迦旃延制定了“在业、作具、因相之义中,用第七格”(2-6-显示巴利原文
Sāmissarādiyoge chaṭṭhīsattamiyo yathā siyunti ‘‘sāmissarādhipatidāyādasakkhipatibhūpasutehi ca ‘‘iti (2-3-39) āraddhaṃ parehi, tadāha-‘sāmi’ccādi, atra ca jinindabuddhinā ‘‘sāmyādīnaṃ bhedeno pādānaṃ pariyāyantaranivatyatthamiha mā hotu gāmassa rājā’’ti vuttaṃ vākyamupanyasya hassāpya yuttattamupadassayamāha-‘sāmissare’ccādi, kena nivārīyate, na kenāpītyattho, visayavacanicchāyaṃ ‘gāme rājā’tyapi bhavitabbamityanenāha, ‘‘āyuttakusalehyāsevāya’’mīti (2-3-40) āraddhaṃ, tadāha-‘āyutte’ccādi, āsavā tapparatā, byāvaṭo niyutto, tatthedaṃ siyā ‘‘āsevāyanti vakkhāmī tyavassaṃ vacanamidamārabbhanīyamaññathā īsaṃyuttepi ‘āyutto go sakaṭassā’ti pasajjatī’’tyāsaṅkiya natthevetampi payojananti dassetumāha-‘vināpi’ccādi, ‘‘sāmissarā’’tyadikaṃ kaccāyanasuttaṃ, tenevāti kaccāyanasutte pasūtasaddānantaraṃ kusalasaddaniddeseneva, idhāti moggallānavuttiyaṃ. Kaccāyanena ‘‘kammakaraṇa nimittatthesu sattamī’’ (2-6-40) ‘‘pañcamyatthe ca’’ (2-6-41) iti ca suttitaṃ, tenāha-‘kamme’ccādi, gahaṇassa bāhā visayoti sambandho, kaccāyanānaṃ‘bhikkhūsū’tiādīni kammatthe udāharaṇāni, hatthesūtiādīni karaṇatthe, kadalīsūti pañcamyatthe. ‘‘Maṇḍitussukkesu tatiyā ce’’ti (2-6-45) kaccāyanasuttaṃ, tadāha ‘pasannatthe’ccādi, pasannattheti maṇḍitatthe, ussukkattheti ussāhatthe.
36. 从……(第五格)显示巴利原文
36. Yato
分别而作,即是简择。胜者觉音阿阇梨说:“此语又有何用?当被简择的部分是聚合体内的一个组成部分时,若欲表达该聚合体的同位关系,则第七格自然成立,如‘树上的枝’;若表达部分与整体的关系,则用第六格,如‘树的枝’。此说虽真实不虚,然此语乃为广释而设。”为了显示此语并非不合理,他说“非米粒”等:在此,“细谷粒”是指细小的谷物,“被放置”即被安住,意思是成为被放置之物。因为“从……”是安住的原因,故“因此”是指:由于胜者觉音的这一说法并非不合理,所以由此原因。“第五格”(2-3-42)是波你尼的经文,因此他说“从聚合体”等。关联是:从所闻的教法而来的戒,是更为殊胜的。其他论师说:“在简择中,当第六格与第七格可得时,此(第五格)是它们的例外,此即关联。”对此,为了显示在此根本没有简择,哪里会有第六格与第七格在此处的运用?因为正是为了遮止它们,才开启了此语,他说“在此,并非由出生等”等。通过“并非”等,显示由出生等没有简择。“由出生等”是指在简择中的第六格。为什么不会发生?他说“因为与出生等的关联”等。“由此假名显示巴利原文
Visuṃ karaṇaṃ niddhāraṇaṃ, jinindabuddhācariyena ‘‘kimatthampunaridaṃ vacanaṃ yāvatā niddhāriyamāno-vayavo samudāyabbhantaro, tattha yadā samudāyassā-dhikaraṇattaṃ vattumicchīyate, tadā sattamī siddhāva, yathā rukkhe sākhāti, yadā tvavayavasambandho tadā chaṭṭhī, yathā rukkhassa sākhāti saccametaṃ papañcatthantu vacana’’nti vuttaṃ, tañceta mayuttantidassento āha-‘na sālayo’ccādisūkayuttānidhaññāni sūkadhaññāni, āhitā avaṭṭhitā, ādheyya bhūtāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yatoti āhitattakāraṇā, tatoti yato jinindabuddhivacanamevamayuttaṃ, tasmā kāraṇā. ‘Pañcamī vibhatte’’ti (2-3-42) pāṇinīya suttaṃ, tadāha-‘samudāyato’ccādi, sutato sakāsā sīlaṃ atisayena seyyoti sambandho, ‘‘niddhāraṇe chaṭṭhī sattamīsu pattesu tadapavādo, yaṃ yogo’’ti parehākhyāyate, tattha tāva niddhāraṇamevettha natthi kuto chaṭṭhīsattamīnaṃ tatthappavatti, yato tāsaṃ bādhanatthamidamārabbhateti dassayamāha-‘nātra jātyādīhi’ccādi, nahiccādinā jātyādīhi niddhāraṇābhāvaṃ dasseti, jaccādīnanti niddhāraṇe chaṭṭhī, kuto na bhavaticcāha-‘jaccādisambandhene’ccādi, ataṃ byapadesatoti sīlattādibyapadesābhāvato, puna niddhāraṇābhāve hetvantaramāha-‘tulyānañce’’ccādi . Sādhunipuṇehi yoge pūjāyaṃ gammamānāyaṃ sattamī, tathā asādhuyoge, tathā pasitaussukkehi yoge tatiyāsattamiyo, tathā lopantanakkhattasaddā ca tena tena vacanantarena pāṇiniyehi vihitā, taṃ sabbaṃ taṃtaṃkārakavacanicchāyameva sādhetuṃ ‘mātari sādhu’ iccādayo udāhaṭā kesesu pasito pasatto, avabaddhoti attho, kesehi karaṇabhūtehi pasito bhavati, kattubhūtehi vā pasito katoti attho, phusseninduyuttena lakkhito kālo soyamityabhedena sambandhā phusse, tena karaṇabhūtena.
“第一格仅表其义”——即便这样说,句义或词义仍不被理解,因为“名”这个词的承袭还在继续。为了显示这一点,他说“从‘二、二、一、多等’的经文”等。以名来呈现的义,被归入名为“名”的所诠之中而呈现,不观待特殊的语尾变化,因此他说“被说示”等。“以本来的形式”即通过名;“它的所诠”即那个所诠;“仅”这个词等,显示“仅”这个词是表示共性的。这样说即是:通过“名的所诠仅是”这一句,以下将要说的被表达了。“在语基之义、性、限量、数目仅此之中,用第一格”(2-3-46),这是依性等差别而制定的第一格用法,因此他说“性、限量”等。性即女性、男性、中性;限量即分齐;数目即单数、多数。即使具有这些,也还是声之义,因此即使具有性等,也还是与形式不同的声之义。基于高、低、共性而使用时,以“高”、“低”等声,第一格确实存在。即使与彼相关,也因为是声之义,所以“高的村庄”等,也是以“高”这一属性为因,通过无差别的关联,在村庄上运用。“悬挂”、“理解”等,由于“对于无数,一切……”(2-119)这一省略规则的制定力,显示巴利原文
Paṭhamātthamatteti ettake vuttepi vākyattho padattho vā na viññāyate nāmaggahaṇānuvattitoti dassetumāha-‘dvedvekānekādi suttato’tiādi, nāmenāttho paṭipādiyamāno nāmasaṅkhāte-ttani abhidheyyattenājjhāropya paṭipādayatyanapekkhita vibhattivisesanti āha-‘abhidhīyati’ccādi, pakatirūpenāti nāmena, tassa abhidheyyassa, mattasaddassātiādinā sāmaññantīdaṃ mattasaddassatthavacananti dasseti, idaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti nāmassābhidheyyamatteti iminā idaṃ vakkhamānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pāṭipadikatthaliṅgaparimāṇavacanamatte paṭhamā’’ti (2-3-46) liṅgādīsu bhedena paṭhamāvidhānampaṭipannā, tadāha-‘liṅgaparimāṇe’ccādi, liṅgaṃ itthipunnapuṃsakāni, parimāṇaṃ paricchedo, saṅkhyā ekattabahuttāni, tabbantopi saddatthoevāti liṅgādivantopi sarūpā byatiritto saddattho eva, uccattanīcattasāmaññampurodhāya pavattiyā uccanīcasaddehi paṭhamā hoteva, taṃyuttassāpi saddatthabhāvato ‘uccaṃ gharāni’tyādīnipi uccattaṃ guṇaṃ nimittaṃ katvā soyamityabhedasambandha gharesu vattantīti. Palambate ajjhāgacchatityādo ‘‘asaṅkhyehi sabbāsaṃ’’ti (2-119) lopavidhānasāmatthiyā pādīhyanatthakehipi paṭhamā siddhāyeva.
以“令面向”等,显示此修习起始的果报。“于名义中”即于声义中;“从词”即从唯示呼格、仅有余义之词。在此有……显示巴利原文
Abhimukhaṃ katvātiādinā yogārambhassa phalaṃ dasseti, nāmattheti saddatthe, padatoti āmantaṇādhikaatthamattappakāsakapadato, honti cettha…
令已成就者面向,唯作呼格;
盖义既已被面向,即运用于此动作;
呼格并非句子的意义,唯由词本身即可了知。
例如“成为国王吧”,其中“成为”既是已成就之义,亦含“存在”之义。
显示巴利原文 Siddhassābhimukhīkāra , mattamāmantaṇaṃ siyā; Attho katābhimukho hi, kriyāyaṃ viniyujjate; Āmantaṇaṃ na vākyattho, padatova patītito; Natthevāmantaṇaṃ loke, vidhātabbena vatthunā; Taṃ yathā bhava rājeti, nippannattho bhaveti ca.
“Siddhassa”(已成就的)指如天授等已成就者;“attho”(义/目的)即天授等;“kataṃ ābhimukhyaṃ samādhānaṃ yena”(由此而作面向、安立)是词句拆解;“kriyāyaṃ viniyujjate”(用于动作中)例如“去!吃!”;“āmantaṇaṃ natthi”(无呼唤)……而今,由于此词是在规定中、本身尚未获得“武器”之性,故不可能面向某人,因此应以“vidhātabbena”(应被规定者)来成就。显示巴利原文
Siddhassāti devadattattādinā siddhassa, atthoti devadattādi, kataṃ ābhimukhyaṃ samādhānaṃ yenāti viggaho, kriyāyaṃ viniyujjate gaccha bhuñjāti, āmantaṇaṃ natthi… idāni vidhīyamānattenāladdhasattikassābhimukhayitumasakkarūpattā, vidhātabbenāti nipphādetabbena.
39. 第六格(属格)显示巴利原文
39. Chaṭṭhī
为了对“行为与作具等”所涉及的论典进行义释,开始说道“这所谓‘关系’是一种……”等。以“由行为与作具所成就”来说明关系以行为‑作具关系为先导。正因如此,此关系并非无因而有,也不是任意两者之间都能成立,唯特定两者之间才有,故无过度扩展之过。行为‑作具关系既为先导,在此之外才有属主等关系。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Kiriyākārakeccādivuttiganthassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattumārabhate ‘ekāyaṃ sambandho nāme’ccādi, kiriyāya kārakehi ca nipphāditoti iminā sambandhassa kiriyākārakasambandha pubbakattamāha, tatoyevāyaṃ nākasmīkoti na yesaṃkesañci dvinnaṃ bhavati, visiṭṭhānaṃyeva tu dvinnaṃ bhavatītyatippasaṅgābhāvo, kiriyākārakasambandhapubbako hi kārakehi añño sassāmibhāvādiko sambandho, tathā ca vuttaṃ–
“关系不同于作具,而以行为‑作具为先导;
于此行为中,不论其词已被听闻或未听闻,此关系皆被说示。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sambandho kārakehañño, kriyākārakapubbako; Sutāyamassutāyaṃvā, kriyāyaṃ so-bhidhīyateti.
其中,当行为词未被听闻时,如“国王的男子”等,所了知的乃是以行为-作具关系为先导的、与此不同的属主等关系。而当听闻到行为词时,如“他忆念国王的”等,此时虽有业存在,却不欲表达,唯以差别之义来显示忆念,即“与国王相关的忆念”。事实上,行为-作具关系依事物实况而遍在,属主等关系即以此为因。在欲表达属主关系时,即使存在行为-作具关系,也不欲表达,如“不凸腹的少女”。当知此关系有多种,以属主、能生-所生、部分-整体等为相。其中,属主关系如“国王的男子”,能生-所生关系如“榕树的种子”,部分-整体关系如“树的枝”。现在,为令知晓此关系由行为-作具关系所生,且依理亦适用于他处,故举出某些例证,说“正如”等。以“其关系由保护行为所造”一句,表明此关系以能护-所护为相。此保护行为在生起此关系的属主性之因后,便即止息。而通过义理与文脉等,可确定此关系属于此行为这一差别;第六格并无确定差别的能力,因其于一切处皆同一相故。或者,当行为词被听闻时,由于不欲表达作为因的作具性,而只欲表达称为属主性的果,故当关系如此生起时,即以第六格说示。显示巴利原文
Tattha assutāyaṃ kiriyāyaṃ ‘rañño puriso’ccādo kiriyā kārakasambandhapubbako-ñño eva sassāmibhāvādiko sambandho patīyateti, ‘sarati rajjassa’tyādo tu suyyamāne kiriyāsadde, ettha pana santamapi kammaṃ vattumanicchitaṃ, visesanabhāvoyeva saraṇampati rajjassa paṭipādīyate’rajjasambandhisaraṇa’nti, kiriyākāraka sambandho hi sabbattha vatthuṭṭhitivasenevatthi, tannimitto ca sassāmi bhāvādi, tattha sassāmibhāvavivacchāyaṃ vijjamānopi kiriyākāraka sambandho na vattumicchito, yathā ‘anudarā kaññā’ti, so cāyaṃ sambandho sassāmibhāvajaññajanakabhāvā-vayavāvayavavibhāvādilakkhaṇo bahuvidhoti veditabbo, tattha sassāmisambandhe rañño puriso, jaññajanakasambandhe nigrodhassa bījaṃ, avayavāvayavisambandhe rukkhassa sākhā, idāni sambandhassetassa kiriyākārakasambandhasañjātattaṃ yathāyogamaññatrāpyavagamayituṃ kiñci udāharaṇamāha-‘tathā hi’ccādi, paripālanakiriyākato nesaṃ sambandhoti iminā paripālyaparipālanalakkhaṇo-yaṃ sambandhoti dasseti, sā ayampari pālanalakkhaṇā kiriyā sambandhamassedambhāvahetuṃ janayitvā nivattati, atthappakaraṇādinā tvimāya kiriyāyāyaṃ sambandhoti viseso vasīyate, na chaṭṭhiyā visesāvagamane sāmatthiyaṃ… tassā sabbatthekarūpattā, suyyamāne eva vā kiriyāsadde kārakabhāvassa hetuno vacanicchāyābhāve assedambhābhāvasaṅkhātasseva phalassa vattumicchitattā tatheva sambandho jāto chaṭṭhiyābhidhīyate ‘rajjassa saratī’ti, vuttaṃ hi–
某种行为生起关系后,便即止息;
当表动作之词被听闻时,关联即于某处生起。
显示巴利原文 Janayitvāna sambandhaṃ, kriyā kāci nivattati; Suyyamāne kriyāsadde, sambandho jāyate kvacīti.
“Paripālayatī”的意思是“他维护那个人”,由此,具有维护等帮助性质的行为,便与那两者相关联。因为由国王所执行的行为,由于以与国王相关联的人为对象,故与“人”相关联;这样,两种行为便都发生。正因如此,当那与两者都有关联的行为发生时,便生起“这是他的”这样的认知;由于具有相互观待性质的关联存在,而此关联是由行为所产生的,其特征是相互观待……若完全无观待,则无关联;而关联的认知是存在的,因此,在国王、人等关联者上,生起“这是他的”这样的认知。为了说明:在不像他人那样有“于功德处用属格”这样的经文的情况下,此处两者都有属格的可能性,所以说“难道不是……”等。确实如此——在承认了所说的责难之后,为了将所说的关联形式也应用到其他情况,并指出那里的属格可能性,责难者说“Devadatto……”等。然后,为了把责难者的意图——即“在没有相互观待特征的关联时,此处唯是表达意愿,这就是原因”——引出来,并特别地将其应用于无属格的情况,他说了“如果这样,那么在这里也……”等。其中,“atha”是不变词,用于开始说明责难者的意图。“应当这样说”的意思是,应当按照“yadi……”等即将说明的方式来说。通过“因为要被理解……”等,他阐明:“因为被区别者(主要事物)不依赖于他者,故非主要,从而区别于(行为);因此,它保持自身形式,不变成其他形式,即‘purisassa’(人的)。而修饰语,如‘国王’等,作为其部分而被陈述,因为非主要,故区别于行为形式;因此,它变成其他形式,即‘rañño’(国王的)。由此,具有区别特征的关联便存在。因为单一事物不可能成为关联者,所以实际上,关联者有两个;通过归属于修饰语而被认知,因此,属格只追随修饰语——在认知领域中,词语的运用(即是如此)。”因为,词语的领域即是分别(vikappana)的领域。正因如此,关联必定随顺修饰语的差别……虽然实际上有两个关联者,但通过归属于它(修饰语)而被认知,正如“兄弟们的财富”一样,并不一定总是“兄弟们的财富”;同样,即使有被区别者的差别,也随顺归属于修饰语的差别,如“Devadatta 的马”。这一切都是因为关联的认知是通过归属于修饰语而产生的,所以才被分别。如果认知也通过归属于被区别者而产生,那么必定会像随顺修饰语的差别一样,随顺归属于它的差别;然而,实际上有两个关联者这一点并不矛盾。那些论者注意到关联者实际上有两个且相互依存,便说关联者有两个。正因如此,这表达区别的格位(属格)……被理解为:它用于表达以被区别的关联者为特征的区别性关联。而像“青色”这样的修饰语,虽然因为为他物而存在故非主要,但并不因行为者关系而区别于……因为“nīla”等词表达了“uppala”等实体,例如“nīlam uppalam passa”(看那青莲花)、“nīlena uppalena ṭhitaṃ”(以青莲花而住)、“nīlassa uppalassa gandho”(青莲花的香)。然而,当不涉及被区别者时,它确实区别开来,如“nīlassa guṇassa uppalannissayo”(青色属性的莲花所依);由于具有行为者关系特征的主要性,青色等确实区别开来。因此,修饰语本身就以多种方式存在。所以,只有某些修饰语因具有行为者形式的主要性而区别开来;不应怀疑,仅凭是修饰语,其余一切也会如此。显示巴利原文
Paripālayatīti purisamparipālayati, tato pālanādikā upakāra sabhāvā kiriyādvinnampi tesaṃ sambandhinī bhavati, raññā hi kāriyamānā taṃsambandhinīpurisavisayattāvapurisayoginītyubhinnampikiriyāsambhavati, tatoyevatassā ubhayasambandhiniyā kiriyāya sambhaveassedanti buddhiyā hetubhūtassa aññamaññāpekkhasabhāvassa sambandhassa bhāvato kiriyājanitattamassa, aññamaññāpekkhālakkhaṇo… sabbathā nirapekkhatte sambandhābhāvā, sambandhi buddhisabbhavassāti sambandhīsu rājapurisādīsu assedanti evampavattāya buddhiyā sabbhavassa. Paresaṃ viya ‘‘guṇe chaṭṭhī’’ti vacanantarābhāve ubhayatthapi (cettha) chaṭṭhippa- saṅgoti bodhetumāha-‘nanu ce’ccādi, saccanti yathā vuttaṃ codanamabbhupagamma codakampati yathāvuttaṃ sambandharūpaṃ tato-ññatrāpyupasaṃ haritvā tattha chaṭṭhippasaṅgaṃ codetumāha-‘devadatto’ccādi, atheva miccādināsatīpiaññamaññāpekkhālakkhaṇe sambandhe vacanicchāyevettha kāraṇanti codakādhippāyamatropanetvā tadeva visesato chaṭṭhiyā abhāve samupanetuṃ‘yajjevamihāpi’ccādikamāha, tattha athāti codakādhippāyappakāsanārambhe nipāto, evaṃ vattabbanti evaṃ yadipiccādinā vakkhamānanayena vattabbaṃ, paṭipādetabbatāyātyādinā idandīpeti ‘‘visessaṃ vidheyatāya na parādhīnanti appadhānabhāvato byatiriccate tato-ttaniṭṭhameva, na rūpantarambhajati‘purisasse’ti, visesanantu rājādikaṃ tadaṅgatāyānuvadiyamānamappadhānattā kārakarūpato byatiriccate, tato rūpantaraṃ bhajati ‘rañño’ti, tato byatireka lakkhaṇo sambandho hoti, ekassa sambandhittāsambhavā vatthuto dviṭṭho visesanagatattena patīyate tato chaṭṭhī visesanamevānudhāvati patītivisaye saddappavattī’’ti, yo hi vikappanaṃ visayo so saddānanti, atoyeva sambandho niyamena visesanabhedamanuvidadhāti… vatthuto dviṭṭhassāpi taggatattena patītiyā yathā bhātūnaṃ dhananti, nāvassambhātūnaṃ dhananticceva bhavati, tathā satyapi visessa bhede visesanagatameva bhedamanu(vidadhā)ti ‘devadattassa assā’ti, tadetaṃ sabbaṃ visesanagatattena sambandhapatītito-vakappīyate, visessagatattenāpi tappatītiyaṃ niyamena taggatabhedānuvidhānaṃ siyā visesanagatabhedānuvidhānamiva, dviṭṭhattantu vatthuto na virujjhate, vattupaṭibaddhameva ca dviṭṭhattaṃ manasikatvā taṃvādīhi dviṭṭho sambandhobhidhīyate, atoyevāyaṃ byatirekavibhatti (yāgamyate)… byatiriccamānavisesanabhūtasambandhigatabyatirekalakkhaṇasambandhābhi- dhānappavattitoti, nīlādivisesanantu paratthattenāppadhānampi na kārakabhāvato byatiriccati… nīlādisaddenuppalādidabbābhidhānato, yathā ‘nīlamuppalampassa, nīlenuppalena ṭhitaṃ, nīlassuppalassa gandho’ti, yadā tu na visessapavatti tadā byatiriccateva ‘nīlassa guṇassa uppalannissayo’ti kārakabhāvalakkhaṇā padhānabhāvā byatiriccate eva nīlādi, tato visesanamevānekappakāratāyāva tiṭṭhate, tato vise- sanaṃ kiñcideva kārakarūpato padhānabhāvā byatiriccateti visesana mattenāpi sesaṃ sabbaṃ tathā siyāti nāsaṅkanīyanti.
“Dvepī”意为国王与人,两者亦是;第三关联者,在于称为“家”者。以“与‘saha’结合而观待”此句,特显人之非主要性。“所认可者”,乃波你尼宗依他经句所许,他们以为,属格基于关联。故说“唯关联耳”等。此处,有关联以母、皈依处、安住等行为为因者;亦有言,因皈依具有行为之性,实体无需另立行为即能关联,犹如紫胶之相合,然紫胶与木之合,则缘于木,非缘另一紫胶之合。复有他宗,于第三格义、第二格义及后缀“kta”之用中,乃至依“chaṭṭhī ca”、“dutiyā pañcamīnañca”等余经句,于第五格、第七格义中,亦许属格。为明即使彼属格亦唯由表意愿而得成立,故说“恰如于此处……”等。于所举二喻中,因无余经句,故无“施者”之义;由此,即使他宗,属格亦唯出于表关联之意愿。故彼言“于此处……”等。彼释显示巴利原文
Dvepīti rājapurisā dvepi, tatiye gehasaṅkhāte sambandhinī. Sahayuttampaṭicca evanti iminā purisassa appadhānattameva dīpeti, abhimatāti pāṇiniyānaṃ suttantarena abhimatā, yato chaṭṭhīya-mattano mate sambandhanissayā, tenāha- ‘sambandhamevi’ccādi, sambandho cettha mātu saraṇānamavaṭṭhānādikiriyānimittoti keci, aññe tu saraṇassa kiriyārūpattā kiriyantaramantareneva dabbena sambandhopapattimāhuyathā dvinnaṃ jatukato saṃsileso, jatuno tu kaṭṭhenāttanāyeva, na jatvantarakato saṃsilesoti. Paresaṃ tatiyatthe dutiyatthe ca kitakappayoge ññatrāpi (pañcamyatthe) sattamyatthe ca (‘‘chaṭṭhī cā’’) ti (2-6-20) dutiyā pañcamīnañcā’’ti (2-6-29) ca suttantarehi chaṭṭhītimatā, tassāpi vatticchātova sādhitabhāvaṃ dassetumāha-yathācetthātiādi, etthāpyādo udāharaṇadvaye suttantaramantarena sampadānattābhāvā sambandhavacanicchāyameva paresampi chaṭṭhī, tenāha-‘etthā’tiādi, bahulantīmassa atthaṃ dasseti ‘yathā dassana’nti, avisaṃvādakālokassatyādikaṃ kamme udāharaṇaṃ, pañcamyatthe pana vatticchātova sabbe tasanti daṇḍassātyādīni udāharaṇāni veditabbāni.
所谓“不被认可的”,是指依据“tulyatthehyatulopamāhi tatiyāññatarissaṃ”这条经句(2-3-72),在与“相等”意义及“不相等、比喻”以外的其他词相结合时,规定了第三格,因此不被波你尼学派所认可。因为相似的事物本身并非比喻,所以可有“没有与阿周那相等的人”等说法。因此,“如此,依已说的方法”这句话的含义应被理解为即是此义。“tadevaṃ”这一不变词组合,其含义正是说明前述的内容。“在相等者中”是指在相似者中;“那样说的”是指以“没有与阿周那相等的人”等方式所说的。显示巴利原文
Anabhimatāti ‘tulyatthehyatulopamāhi tatiyāññatarissa’nti (2-3-72) suttena tulopamāhi aññehi tulyatthehi yoge tatiyāya vidhīyamānattā pāṇiniyānaṃ anabhimatā, yasmā sadisā bhāvā tesaṃ nopamāti ‘ajjunassa tulā natthī’tyādikamuccate, tasmā evaṃ yathāvuttanayenāti tadevantīmassa attho veditabbo, tadevanti vā nipātasamudāyo yathāvuttanidassanattho, tulyesūti sadisesu, tathāvuttāti ajjunassatulānatthītyādinā tena pakārena vuttā.
经中说到“从ato”,有人问:“如何说‘从无a结尾’?”于是答说“从ato”等。须补上“成为替换形式”。唯有yakāra才会出现;由于ā、e等替换形式是单一音素,当对o的删除完成——即o被删除后——那便否定了dhacādi等。否定时说明理由:“因为后删”等。为了说明另一理由,复言“而且”等。总是只有后删,不可能有前删,因为这与增音的使用相顺;也可以这样说,于是又说“也不”等。关联是:并非总是只有后删,也不能这样说。以“若是如此”等指出其中的矛盾。因为从ato产生,即从替换形式的a产生。对于jhi的a的规定,即“yosu jhissa pume”(2-93),正是为此目的等,在说明所述目的不成立时给出理由:“因为非所欲”,意思是“因为不是所期望的”。为显示正是由于目的不存在而非所期望,又说“正是为此目的”等。至于这个,即“ato yonaṃ ṭāṭe”这条规则,只是“jhismā”而已,也就是“jhismā”这样的规则本身,或者“jhismā yonaṃ ṭāṭe”这样的规则。而显示巴利原文
Sutte ‘ato’ti vuttaṃ ‘akārantato’ti kathaṃ vuttīti āha ‘ato’tiādi, ādesā hontīti seso, yakārānaṃyeva siyuṃ… āeādesānamekavaṇṇattā, lope kateti okārassa lope kate, tanneti yathāvuttaṃ dhacādyappaṭikkhipati, paṭikkhepe kāraṇamāha-‘paralopassā’tiādi, kāraṇantaraṃ vattumārabhate ‘kiñcā’tiādi, niccamparalopova siyā, na pubbalopopi āgamappayogānukūlyenātipi sakkā vattunti āha-‘nacā’tiādi, niccamparalopoyevāti na ca sakkā mantunti sambandho, evaṃ santetyādinā tattha virodhamāha, atosambhavāti ādesākārato sambhavā, jhissākāravidhānaṃ ‘‘yosu jhissa pume’’ti (2-93) etadevapayojanantiādinā vuttappayojanābhāve kāraṇamāha-‘aniṭṭhattā’ti, anabhimatattāti attho, payojanābhāvānabhimatattameva dassesumāha-‘etadatthamevā’tiādi, imassāti ‘‘ato yonaṃ ṭāṭe’’tī massa suttassa, jhismātvevāti ‘jhismā’ iti etādisaṃ suttameva, jhismā yonaṃ ṭāṭetivāti ‘‘jhismā yonaṃ ṭāṭe’’ti suttaṃ vā, atoti ‘ato’ iti suttaṃ, tādisassapayogassāti aggā, agge iti payogassa.
42. nī 词干的(复数属格)显示巴利原文
42. Nīnaṃ
因为只举了一个词形为例,所以应当了知色与非色、色与色等的差别。由此,在复数第一格与第二格中,他只举了“aṭṭhīnī”这一个词形为例,以此表明。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ekameva rūpamudāhaṭaṃ, tasmā rūpārūpāni rūperūpānīti bhedo veditabbo, tena hi bahuvacane paṭhamādutiyāsu ‘aṭṭhīnī’ti ekameva rūpamudāhaṭanti dasseti.
44. sassa 的(属格)显示巴利原文
44. Sassāya
若问:“suñi中的ñakāra有何作用?”便说“ñakāro”等。因为若无ñakāra,以ñakāra为限定语的“ñānubandho”便无法限定sukāra;唯有ñakāra存在,才可用它来限定。因此在“ñakānubandhādyantā”这一规则中,“ñakānubandhā”作为限定语,其限定作用就是它的意义与目的,故称为“具有限定意义的成分”。为了说明注疏中以“bhiyyo”等为例、借由“bahulaṃ”一词而将非所期望、非剩余的意义确定下来,于是开始以“sāmaññena”等展开说明。应补充“成为第六格”。又,若问:在以“attha”一词构成的有财释复合词中,如何能把握第四格的含义?答:在“第四格单数,以自身为目的”的运用中,听闻正法等仅是原因;在有财释复合词中,该含义也同样存在。对于有财释而言,自身即是目的,以原因之方式存在,因此意义并无差别。对于“ta eta ima”这些词以外的所有词——即除了这些词之外的所有词。为了说明即使在显示巴利原文
Suñiti ñakāro kimatthoti āha-‘ñakāro’tiādi, asati hi ñakāre‘ñānubandho’ti ñakārena visesanena sukāro na visesī yeyya satiyeva tasmiṃ tena so visesīyeyya, tasmā ‘‘ñakānubandhādyantā’’ti sutte ‘ñakānubandhā’ti visesanaṃ visesanabhāvo attho payojanaṃ yassa so visesanattho, bahulaṃ vacanenānabhimatamanavasesaṃ vavatthāpīyatīti vuttiyaṃ ‘‘bhiyyo’’tyādikamupadiṭṭhanti dassetumupakkamate ‘sāmaññenā’tiādinā, chaṭṭhī bhavatīti (se)so, nanuca atthasaddenāññapadatthasamāse kathaṃ catutthyattho-vasīyatīti vuccate, catutthīekavacane attattha’nti ettha saddhammasavanādikamattanimittanti yo-ttho, so cattho-ñña padatthepi, tassā-ññapadatthabhūtassāpi attā attho payojanambhavati nimittabhāvenāti nātthabhedoti ta eta imavajjitānaṃ sabbādīnanti ta etaimasaddehi eva vajjitānamaññesaṃ sabbādīnaṃ, paṭisiddhesupi kassaci ādeso dissatīti dassetumāha‘tasaddassa cā’ti.
45. gha、pa 词尾显示巴利原文
45. Ghapa
“itthiyā”、“vadhuyā”等是“ī”和“ū”名称的示例。显示巴利原文
Itthiyā vadhuyāti pasaññānamī ūnamudāharaṇāni.
46. 词尾 ssa 与 ā显示巴利原文
46. Ssāvā
“由具gha与pa名称者”——此应视为以“ti”等和“tī”构成的有财释复合词,或作为限定语。注疏中说“已作”等,是为了阐明作者等类别。“以彼”则是一切处显示可选择例证的语句。显示巴利原文
Ghapasaññehīti idaṃ tetimāmūhi tīmassa aññapadatthasamāsena vā visesanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, vuttiyaṃ katanti ādikaṃ kattādippakāsanatthaṃ kataṃ, tāyāti sabbattha vikappodāharaṇaṃ.
47. 于 nam 中显示巴利原文
47. Namhi
“增音成为其附属,藉由对它的摄取而被摄取”——这是一条释义原则。其中,“成为其附属”是说该增音在此成为附属,以组成部分的方式放在后面,并非主要成分;“藉由对它的摄取”则指通过摄取增音、透过对它的摄取而被摄取,也就是通过摄取代词“naṃ”而成就增音的摄取。然而,应当说“在namhi这一语尾时”,此处亦可视为语序倒置。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āgamā tagguṇībhūtā taggahaṇena gayhantī’’ti paribhāsā vacanametaṃ tattha tagguṇībhūtāti tasmiṃ āgamimhi guṇībhūtā, avayavavasena pacchā bhavanto amukhyabhūtā, taggahaṇenāti āgamiggahaṇena taggahaṇena gahaṇatoti āgamibhūtassa naṃ iccassa gahaṇena gahaṇato, ‘namhi vibhattimhi’ti tu vattabbaṃ, vipallāso vā ettha daṭṭhabbo.
以“ikārasseva vā”等所说明的内容,再用“tissa”等加以解释。此处tassa的tissa,因其已指明,故称“tissa已指明”。依据“namhi ticatunnamitthiyaṃ tissa catassā”(2-20)而得tissa替换;依据“namhi nuka dvādīnaṃ sattarasanna”(2-47)而得nuka;由此而成tissannaṃ。显示巴利原文
(49) Ikārassevavātiādinā vuttameva vivarati tissa iccādinā, tassa tissa, niddiṭṭhattāti tissa niddiṭṭhattā, ‘‘namhi ticatunnamitthiyaṃ tissa catassā’’ti (2-20) tissādeso ‘‘namhi nuka dvādīnaṃ sattarasanna’’nti (2-47) nuka, tissannaṃ.
“Vibhattisutta”者,指“dvedvekānekesvi”(2-1)等经句;“ssana”者,是以复数形式兼说单数;“此经句”者,即“suñsassā”这一经句;“而当经句存在时”者,是说“suña sassā”这一经句存在之时。显示巴利原文
Vibhattisutteti ‘‘dvedvekānekesvi’’(2-1) ccādisutte, ssananti bahuvacanena sahitamekavacanamāha, suttamidanti ‘‘suñsassā’’ti idaṃ suttaṃ, sutte pana satīti ‘‘suña sassā’’ti sutte sati.
“Ratti”与“ādi”合为“ratyādayo”,以这些(词形)为准。显示巴利原文
Ratti ca ādi ca ratyādayo, tehi.
“依模拟方式”者,指的是随顺相似而作的语言表达,亦即模拟(anukaraṇa)。显示巴利原文
Anukaraṇavasenāti anusadisaṃ karaṇaṃ vacanamanukaraṇaṃ.
“Tenāti”意为“因此”。由于以“ltu”作为限定语、依其差别而说所想要表达的缘(paccaya),故说“tena”,即“因此”之义。由把握缘而得把握他们之始……依“于把握缘时,凡彼所施设者,即把握他们之始”这一理趣,且因是依差别而说所想要表达者,故把握他们之末……又依“规则以限定语之末”(1-13)之说,故存心而说“yato”等。所谓“so kriyattho ādi yassa so tadādi”,意为“彼作用义为其始者,称为tadādi”;所谓“so paccayo anto yassa samudāyassa so tadanto”,意为“彼缘为其末的那个集合体,称为tadanta”。这便是把握如是他们之始末的集合体差别,而非仅把握他们之末。若问:当以“ltvī”作为限定语、依差别而说所想要表达者时,依“规则以限定语之末”而把握他们之末,这尚可成立;然而,由把握缘又如何能把握他们之始呢?因为没有直接言说的缘故。答曰:“因彼(缘)与彼(始)不相离故。”凡依彼(始)而施设者,若离彼(缘)则不能成立,犹如戒。显示巴利原文
Tenāti yato ltuiti visesanattena vattumicchitassa paccayassa gahaṇaṃ, tenāti attho, paccayassa gahaṇā tadādigahaṇaṃ labbhate… ‘‘paccayaggahaṇe yato so vihito, tadādino gahaṇa’’nti ñāyā, visesanattena vattumicchitattā tadantaggahaṇaṃ… ‘‘vidhibbisesanantassā’’ti (1-13) vacanatoti manasi nidhāyāha- ‘yato’iccādi, so kriyattho ādi yassa so tadādi, so paccayo-nto yassa samudāyassa so tadanto, tādisassa tadā ditadantasamudāyavisesa(ssa) gahaṇaṃ, na tu tadantamattassetyattho, nanu ca ‘ltvī’ti visesanattena vattumicchite bhavatu ‘‘vidhibbisesanantassā’’ti tadantassa gahaṇaṃ, paccayaggahaṇena pana tadādino gahaṇaṃ kathaṃ siyā vacanābhāvātyāha-‘tadavinābhāvittā’ti, yato vihito, tena vinā na bhavati sīlenāti tadavinābhāvī, tassa bhāvo tasmā. ‘‘Paccayaggahaṇe yato so vihito tadādino gahaṇa’’nti ñāyassa yattha paccayaggahaṇaṃ tattha sādhāraṇattā ‘tadādino’ti vuttaṃ, tadādisamudāyassa gahaṇe panettha viseso na dissati… adhikattāti ādīsu visesadassanāsambhavā, ‘tuṃsmā lopo cicchāyaṃ te’’ tyatra (5-4) tu dissati viseso, vakkhatihi tattha ‘‘tuṃtāyetave bhāve bhavissati kriyāyaṃ tadatthāya’’nti (5-61) tuṃpaccayaṃ vakkhati’’ccādi.
所谓“应说‘gea’即可”,意为只应说“gea”。“在另一情形中,唯以长音规则”,是说在已作此a音替代的另一情形中,唯依长音规则。“因在他处发挥其用途故”,是说从以ltu等为尾等的别处,如bhopurisā、bhopurisa等,因其依所属类别之词义为所依而发挥其用途,即表示依属格意义的用途。“必然长音化之因”,则以“而若是a音”等说明;而“而若是a音”一句,是词句的分断。显示巴利原文
Aityevavattabbanti ‘gea’ityeva vattabbanti vuttaṃ hoti, pakkhe dīghavidhānenevāti iminā akārādese kate pakkhe dīghavidhāneneva, aññatthacaritatthatāyāti ltvantādito aññattha bhopurisā bhopurisaiccādo jātipadatthanissayanena katatthatāya, parisa mattatthatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, avassaṃ dīghabhāve kāraṇamāha ‘yadicākāro’iccādi, yadica ākāroti padacchedo.
60. Ghabrahmā显示巴利原文
60. Ghabrahmā
“Ghaitisaññā”即“ghasaññā”等,因“ghasaññā”在“kaññāsaññā”等中数量众多,故以复数形式表述。“gharūpassāti”,即“ghassa”之词形,指gha音之词形。同样,此处“bho brahmāti”,以“tathā”一词显示brahmā之词形在语法论中已被述及,故此处已含摄。如此解释,即依“sa sakhato gassa akāraākārā”等而作。他们将“aca āca ica īca ecā”等复合词中的前元音省略,而说为“ettu”的近接表述。“sāmaññavidhānaṃ”,即不作特别区分而泛说“brahmakattuisi sakhato”。此泛说有何目的?即“kimatthaṃ”。对于此目的之疑念与目的之疑念考察,由于已说“āgati gaṇoya”等,故说“atthato”等。“atthato”,即从义理而言;“anena”,即以此“āgatigaṇoya”之言说。此意谓:若以……显示巴利原文
Ghaitisaññā ghasaññā tāsaṃ, kaññāsaññātiādīsu ghasaññānaṃ bahuttā bahuvacanena niddeso, gharūpassāti ghassāti ghasaddarūpassa, tathā bho brahmāti ettha tathāti iminā brahmātirūpassa niruttiyaṃ niddiṭṭhattāva ettha saṅgahitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ vivarantīti tasmā sa sakhato gassa akāraākārā’’tiādinā evaṃ vivaranti, te hi aca āca ica īca ecāti dvande pubbasarānaṃ lopaṃ katvā ettupasilesaniddesaṃ vaṇṇenti, sāmaññavidhānanti ‘brahmakattuisi sakhato’ccevamavisesetvā sāmaññena kathanaṃ, kimatthanti kiṃ attho payojanaṃ yassa taṃ kimatthaṃ. Sāmaññavidhānaṃ kimatthampanevaṃ payojanāsaṅkāyaṃ payojanāsaṅkāvicāraṇaṃ manasi nidhāya ‘āgati gaṇoya’nti vuttattā āha– ‘atthato’ccādi, atthatoti sā matthiyato, anenāti‘āgatigaṇoya’nti iminā vacanena, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘āgatigaṇoyanti iminā tadākārasaṅkhātajātippadhānagaṇattappakāsanena yadi sambodhane ekārantākārantalābhīnaṃ kattu isi sakha muni bhadantādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ payojanaṃ na siyā, aññathā anupapajjanaṃ siyāti evamaññathānupapattilakkhaṇasāmatthiyato sāmaññavidhāne payojanamāhe’’ti, soyanti iminā vuttiyaṃ ‘āgati gaṇoya’nti vuttaṃ vacanaṃ nidasseti.
63. Ghossa(声音)显示巴利原文
63. Ghossaṃ
“ssaṃ”“ss┓ssāyaṃ”“añca”“tiñca”——在相互关联的意义上,此处为持业释(同格复合词),构成ssaṃ、ssā、ssāyaṃ、tiṃsu。显示巴利原文
Ssañca ssāca ssāyoca añca tiñcāti itarītarayoge cattha samāso,ssaṃ ssā ssāyaṃ tiṃsu.
以gho、o音结尾以及以ghā音结尾之词,实则以o音收尾;末尾无gho音者,名为agho。于这些情形,因规则依共通性而施设,故不特定指向某一性别,唯依共通性而制定。因此,nā等词中的ekavacanesu,意即“在单数中”。hi表原因,由于有人可能因此生起错误意图,故此为第二例证。dutiyopi亦表原因,为摄一切故,并非如所误解之义。若不能摄尽一切单数形式,便说明经典的编纂方式,即说aññathā等语。对于uparicā等,己意为:“由于经典编纂为‘aṃyosvaghona’,依共通性,在单数中agha会转为narassa的状态,因缺乏对此的遮止,故‘daṇḍi kula’中的‘daṇḍi’会发生短音化,而‘sismiṃ napuṃsake’这条制定规则的经典便会如此宣说。” 所谓okārantappaṭisedhaṃ,即遮止以o音结尾者,也就是aghona这样的遮止。另一种显示巴利原文
Ghoca oca gho ghāntaokārantā, natthi gho yesante agho, tesaṃ, sāmaññavidhānatoti kassaci liṅgassa aparāmāsā sāmaññena vidhānato, nādekavacanesūti nādīsu ekavacanesūti attho, hi hetumhi, yasmā kassaci evaṃ duṭṭhādhippāyo siyā, tasmā dutiyamudāharaṇanti attho, dutiyopi hetumhi, yasmā sabbesaṃ saṅgahaṇatthaṃ, tasmā na ca tathādhippetanti attho, sabbesamekavacanānaṃ saṅgahaṇābhāve suttānaṃ viracanappakāramāha-‘aññathā’tiādi, uparicātyādīsvayamadhippāyo ‘‘suttassa ‘aṃyosvaghona’nti viracitattā sāmaññene-kavacanesvaghassa narassattappatīti tappaṭisedhābhāvā’daṇḍi kula’nti rassattaṃ ‘sismiṃ napuṃsake’ti vidhisuttaṃ vadeyyā’’ti, okārantappaṭisedhanti ‘aghona’nti okārantappaṭisedhaṃ, ādesantaraṃ ‘‘gossā gasihinaṃ sugāvagavā’’tyādinā (2-67) karīyamānaṃ gāvādesādikaṃ, ettha pana napuṃsake ekavacanantaṃ daṇḍi kulanti vakkhamānattā nodāhaṭaṃ, yosu pana ‘‘yolopanisudīgho’’ti (2-88) adīghassāpi dīghavidhānasāmatthiyā paṭhamameva dīghassa rassābhāvekāva kathāti nodāhaṭaṃ, daṇḍīdaṇḍīni icceva tu bhavati, nossavāti pāṭho dissati, ettha vijjamāne ge pare okārantassa vā rassāpajjanadosampasaṅgato nossā’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
67. Gossā(牛的)显示巴利原文
67. Gossā
gāvena与gavena在工具格中也相同;gāvassa与gavassa在属格中也相同。显示巴利原文
Gāvena gavenāti karaṇepi samānaṃ, gāvassa gavassāti chaṭṭhiyāpi.
69. Gava(牛)显示巴利原文
69. Gavaṃ
因经文具作senā,故se乃是于释义之时所假立之因由。显示巴利原文
Senāti sutattā seiti vuttiyaṃ nimittaṃ parikappitaṃ.
72. Gāvu(牛)显示巴利原文
72. Gāvu
“saddantarattena”意指“有些过失”,这是其关联;所应指示的替代形式,应当被作出。显示巴利原文
Saddantarattena koci dosoti sambandho, ādisitabbā ādesā kātabbā.
73. Yaṃ(关系代名词)显示巴利原文
73. Yaṃ
“pena”与“pasaññā”结合,便有了“ī”与“pī”;或“paca”与“īca”等,依不分别而总摄;对于其他,即“i”音、“u”音、“ū”音。显示巴利原文
Pena pasaññāya yuttā īpī, paca so īcāti vāpī abhedaggahaṇena, aññassāti ikāra ukāraūkārassa.
第77项:词根 [Pali: smi],义为“微笑”。显示巴利原文
77. Smi
世间上,提婆达多即称达多,这是以部分代表整体的通行称呼,故将“smiṃ”一词理解为“微笑”义,进而显示引申之义,因此说“以smiti等”。显示巴利原文
Loke devadatto dattoti ekadesena samudāyavohāra dassanato sminotīmassa smiṃ vacanassātyayamattho dassitotyāha-‘smiti iminā’tiādi.
第81项:词根 [Pali: jhalā],义为“照耀、发光”。显示巴利原文
81. Jhalā
所谓“在梵天等中”的“从此处某处,sassa的ṭānubandho”这一读法表示关联。“梵天等中”即《ghabrahmādite》(2-60)经句中所说的梵天等;“读法”指“ito”等《群经》(gaṇasutta)的读法;而“ṭānubandho”则指示了(eṭādesaṃ)。显示巴利原文
Brahmādīsu ‘ito kvaci sassa ṭānubandho’ti pāṭhāti sambandho, brahmādīsūti ‘‘ghabrahmādite’’ti (2-60) sutte vuttabrahmādīsu, pāṭhāti ‘ito’tyādino gaṇasuttassa pāṭhā, ṭānubandhoti iminā (eṭādesaṃ) niddisati.
第85项:词根 [Pali: kū],义为“发声、鸣叫”。显示巴利原文
85. Kū
“其末尾为何,彼即以其为末尾”,这是就集合义而言。对此,有智者之言:“cānukaḍḍhitaṃ nottaratrānuvattatī”。以viduno为vidū,是kū词尾语词的示例;以viññuno为viññū,如“vito ñāto”(5-39)所述;以sabbaññuno为sabbaññū,如“kammā”(5-40)所述。显示巴利原文
So anto yassa so tadanto samudāyo, tassa, ‘‘cānukaḍḍhitaṃ nottaratrānuvattatī’’ti viññūvacanaṃ, viduno vidūti kūpaccayantassa udāharaṇaṃ, viññuno viññūti ‘‘vito ñāto’’ti (5-39) sabbaññuno sabbaññūti ‘‘kammā’’ti (5-40).
第86项:词根 [Pali: lo]。显示巴利原文
86. Lo
“说为lo即已成立”,意谓在省略的情形中,单凭“说为lo”本身即已成就。显示巴利原文
Lopotveva siddhattāti vomuttapakkhe lopotīmināva siddhattā.
87. 以nano结尾者。显示巴利原文
87. Nano
“Amuyā”是阴性词干上的yā词缀,此乃对“以nano结尾者”的反例。显示巴利原文
Amuyāti itthiyaṃ yādeso, nanotīmassidaṃ paccudāharaṇaṃ.
88. 以yolo结尾者。显示巴利原文
88. Yolo
第一与第二词干合为一处的例子是“aṭṭhī aṭṭhīni”,这些例子已通过yolo在Lātissa中显示,其余也应同样理解。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamādutiyāyonamekato udāharaṇāni aṭṭhī aṭṭhīniti, tānica yolopanilātisseva dassitāni, tathāyevāññānipi ñāyantīti.
92. Nt 之格位。显示巴利原文
92. Ntassa
“Ṭa 代换后脱落的一方”:即对不存在的(语基)所作,以 ṭa 代换后,脱落的一方;“ntussa 正是……”因为已是众所周知的,故用来比喻 ṭa 代换后脱落的一方;依据“由此,由‘sañjātaṃ tārakāditvito’等而来”(5-45),从那里推导出来。显示巴利原文
Ṭamuttapakkhoti asantaṃ kubbantassāti ṭādesena muttapakkho,ntussacevanti pasiddhattāva ṭādesamuttapakkhaṃ upameti, ‘‘sañjātaṃ tārakāditvito’’ti (5-45) ito andhitā.
93. 于 yo 诸格中。显示巴利原文
93. Yosu
“Ṭādeso-tippasajjatī”为何这么说?难道不是当整个组合成立时,依“第六格词尾的”(1-17)所说,只是词尾部分,如此则不会有过失,所以为何还说有过失?诚然如此,可是,因为可以说成“jhissā”,却说成了issā,从义理上看,整个组合的ṭā代换便成过失,因此才这么说。难道即使说“jhissā”,过失也同样存在?确实一样,然而,如果认可整个组合的ṭā代换,那么“既然如此,为何还用jha来把握?直接说issa即可,并无过失”——在用jha来把握时,仅仅是名词末尾的i有jha的名称,这只是作为简别而说,这样在想要表达时是合理的。显示巴利原文
Ṭādeso-tippasajjatīti kasmā vuttaṃ nanu tadantassa samudāyassa patte ‘‘chaṭṭhiyantassā’’ti (1-17) antasseva hoti, tathāsati nevātippasaṅgo, tasmā kasmātippasajjatīti vuttanti, saccaṃ, tathāpi ‘jhissā’ti vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyatte issāti vuttatta sāmatthiyato tadantassa ṭādeso-tippasajjatīti tathā vuttanti, nanu ‘jhissā’ti vuttepi sovātippasaṅgo tadavatthoyevāti saccaṃ, tathāpi yadi samudāyassa ṭādeso-bhimato siyā ‘tathā sati kiṃ jhaggahaṇena issatveva vadeyyāti nātippasajjatīti, jhaggahaṇe nāmante ikārasseva jhasaññattāti idaṃ pana visesanattena vattu manicchite yujjati.
94. va 变为 ve。显示巴利原文
94. Vevo
“共同行为之理”:即“那些共同从事的,以该词来把握”之理。显示巴利原文
Sahacaritañāyassāti ‘‘taṃsahacaritā taggahaṇena gayhantī’’ti ñāyassa.
95. 于 yo 与 mhi 中。显示巴利原文
95. Yomhi
为了显示:从hetu、kuru等词,在yo诸格中,依此ṭā代换,或依“lopo”这一规则在yo词尾消失可得时,由于“缘于词缀的是外分”而yo词尾消失,又由于“缘于词基的是内分”及“内外分中,内分规则更强”,所以在ṭā代换先起作用、所依不现起的情况下,词尾消失便不会发生——为说明此义,而说“hetukurusaddehi”等。显示巴利原文
Hetukurusaddehi yosu iminā ṭādese ‘‘lopo’’tīminā yolope vā sampatte ‘‘paccayanissitaṃ bahiraṅga’’nti yolopato ‘‘pakatinissitamantaraṅga’’nti ‘‘antaraṅgabahiraṅgasu antaraṅgavidhi balavā’’ti paṭhamaṃ ṭādese nimittābhāvāva lopā bhāvoti dassetumāha-‘hetukurusaddehi’ccādi.
难道不是 katara 等词才是 sabba 等词所表达的意义吗?因为已由复合词(samāsa)表达,而非由 sabba 一词。因此说“以部分”等。虽然“sabba 一词是它们的开头”这样以部分作解释,但整体才是它的意义……以 yesaṃ 来指涉整体,这是它的性质。iti 表示原因(于原因格)。当从两人或多人中,对某位天、某位授,或以 kaṭha 等义,从两个或多个中,对某一者作简择时,为了显示在简择中,于 ratara、ratamesu 等规则里,依据“意义同一性”(2-119)词尾消失,依据“rānubandha 等开头词的”(4-132)开头词消失,kiṃ 词的形式如何成立,而说出“katamā”等。它有两者部分,在此意义上,依据“ayubha 两者部分”(4-49)的 aye,依据“元音消失于元音”(1-26)元音消失,形式得以成立,故说“ubho aṃsā”等。什么是身体的确立?说“sābhidheyyā”等。以 avadhi 等阐明其义。不坏、不灭即是 avadhi 状态的确立。sābhidheyyā pekkhā:在此,自…显示巴利原文
Nanu katarādayova sabbādisaddavacanīyā honti samāsenābhihitattā, na tu sabbasaddo tyāha-‘avayavene’tyādi,yadipi ‘sabba saddo ādi yesa’nti avayavena viggaho, tathāpi samudāyovāssattho bhavati… yesantyanena samudāyassa parāmāsāti bhāvo, itīti hetumhi, ko bhavantānaṃ dvinnaṃ bahunnaṃ vā eko deva datto kaṭhādīhi vā atthe dvīhi bahūhi vā ekassa niddhāraṇe sati kimhā niddhāraṇe ratara ratamesu ṇādivuttiyaṃ ‘‘ekatthatāya’’nti (2-119) vibhattilope ‘‘rānubandhentasarādissā’’ti (4-132) antasarādilope kiṃsaddassa rūpasiddhīti dassetumāha katamā’tiādi, ubho aṃsā assāti atthe ‘‘ayubhadvitīhaṃse’’ti (4-49) aye‘‘saro lopo sare’’ti (1-26) saralope rūpasiddhīti āha-‘ubho aṃsā’iccādi, kāyaṃ vavatthā nāme tyāha-‘sābhidheyyā’tyādi, avadhiccādinā tassevātthaṃ vibhāveti, adhaṃso abhaṭṭhatā avadhibhāveyevāvaṭṭhānaṃ, sābhidheyyā pekkhāti ettha so sako abhidheyyo attho disādi sābhidheyyoti gahitoti āha-‘pubbādīna’ntiādi, sābhidheyyanti kammato parā apapubbā ‘ikkha=dassane’tīmasmā ‘‘kvacaṇa’’iti (5-41) aṇpaccaye sābhidheyyāpekkho, so vāvadhiniyamoti dassetumāha-‘tamapekkhati’ccādi, tatthādhippāyaṃ vivarati ‘tathāhi’ccādinā, ettha ca parādisaddābhidheyyo-ttho disādesādi pubbādisaddābhidheyyassātthassa disāya desādino vāvadhibhāvena niyamavasena pavattati, yo cāvadhibhāvo niyamavasena pavattati, socāvadhibhāvo niyamavasena pavatto pubbādisaddavacanīyaṃ disādesādi mapekkhatīti sābhidheyyāpekkhovadhiniyamoyeva vavatthāti vuccatītyayamadhippāyo, na tu abhidheyyāyanti asambhavā, asambhavameva dassento āha-‘yo hi’ccādi, kosallena nimittenāti kusala saddassa pavattinimittena kosallena, uttarākuravo uttarakurudīpa vāsino, deso vā, ‘nāññañca nāmappadhānā’’ti (2-136) aneneva saññāyaṃ sabbādikāriyassa nisiddhatte kimasaññāyaṃbhyanenetyāha ‘nāññañce’tyādi, kiñci pubbattādikamuddissa kesañci pubboparotyādikā atthānugatā saññā anvatthasaññā.
“vā 于多义中”(3-17):由于延续着 vikappa,显示出无合理之处,故说“nayidamayuttaṃ”。而其合理性,在经文中表现出相违,故说“napuṃsake”等。因为经文随顺读诵,而 vikappa 的延续——这一非中性的词句,在某些地方存在相违,这是(规则的)指示,故说“tassa ca”等。在此必须如此把握意义,否则,如果依据所住经文的次第来把握意义,由于经文的主要性已被认知,如何能成为其他的指示呢?因为在主要性中,指示义是不合理的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vānekaññatthe’’ti (3-17) vikappānuvattanato ayuttattābhāvaṃ dasseti‘nayidamayutta’nti, yuttatā cāssa pāṭhe byabhicāra dassanatoti vattumāha-‘napuṃsake’ccādi, pāṭhānugatā hi suttaracanā, vikappānuvattiyā anapuṃsakamidameva vacanaṃ tassa kvaci byabhicāratte ñāpakanti vattumāha-‘tassa cā’tiādi, avassamevamettha attho gahetabbo, aññathā yathāvaṭṭhitapāṭhānukkamenātthaggahaṇe sati suttassa mukhyattappatītito kathantamaññassa ñāpakaṃ bhaveyya, mukhyabhāve hi ñāpakatthaṃ na yujjeyya.
108. 在 ate 之后显示巴利原文
108. Ate
难道依据“在特征所宣说与词句所宣说之中,唯取词句所宣说”这一规则,特征的形态便不被取用吗?为了消除此疑,他解释道:“于短音形态”等。此规则的含义如下:“用以标示者,即是特征;对善与不善的认知,即由经句说为经句;已到达的词句,即词句;已宣说者,即直接之义。特征与词句,合称特征与词句;由它们所宣说的形态,即特征所宣说与词句所宣说;在其中,‘宣说’一词分别与每一者结合,即‘在特征所宣说中、在词句所宣说中’。其中,凡仅由特征显示而得知——即当此特征存在时,必然有此形态——由特征所引导的,便称为特征所宣说;而凡直接由词句本身所引导的,便称为词句所宣说。当有特征所宣说与词句所宣说两种形态存在时,唯取词句所宣说,不取另一者。”由“唯取词句所宣说”这一限定,可知此规则具确定性的本质;而此确定性,唯有在基于不确定性的疑惑存在时,才能成立。因此,在唯有特征所宣说、而无词句所宣说之处,此规则不适用;在唯有词句所宣说、而无特征所宣说之处,此规则亦不适用。唯有在两种形态都可能出现之处,此规则才以消除疑惑的方式起作用。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘lakkhaṇapaṭipadavuttesu paṭipadavuttasseva gahaṇa’’ntīmāya paribhāsāya lakkhaṇikassākārassa gahaṇaṃ na pappotītyāsaṅkiya paṭipādayamāha-‘rassākāre’ccādi, paribhāsāya cassāyamattho ‘‘lakkhīyateneneti lakkhaṇaṃ, sādhvasādhujānana hesuttā sutta muccate, paṭigatampadaṃ paṭipadaṃ, uccāritamañjasetyattho, lakkhaṇañca paṭipadañca lakkhaṇapaṭipadāni, tehi vuttāni rūpāni lakkhaṇapaṭipadavuttāni, tesu, vuttasaddo paccekamparisamāpīyate ‘lakkhaṇavuttesu paṭipadavuttesū’ti, tatrāñcasā yamaniddiṭṭhaṃ, kevalaṃ lakkhaṇadassanenāsmiṃ lakkhaṇe satyavassamanena rūpena bhavitabbanti lakkhaṇena paṭipāditaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇavuttamityuccate, yantvañjasā saddeneva paṭipāditaṃ, taṃ paṭipadavuttanti vuccate, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇavutte paṭipadavutte ca rūpe sati paṭipadavuttasseva gahaṇaṃ, netarasse’’ti, paṭipadavuttassevetyavadhāraṇena niyamarūpabhāssā paribhāsāyāvagamyate, so ca niyamo aniyamapubbake sandehe satyavatiṭṭhate, tasmā yatra lakkhaṇavuttameva kevalaṃ, na paṭipadavuttaṃ, tatra nāyaṃ paribhāsā vatiṭṭhate, yatrāpi paṭipadavuttameva kevalaṃ, na lakkhaṇavuttaṃ, sopyetissā avisayo, yatra dve rūpāni sambhavanti tatrevā yamparibhāsā sandehāpākaraṇamukhena pavattāti ñāyappattoyevā mattho imāya paribhāsāyānuvādyate, tathāhi sandehaṭhānesu yadyapyekarūpamevamabhinnamubhinnaṃ, tathāpi lakkhaṇavuttaṃ rūpaṃ lakkhaṇe nonnīyamānaṃ dhūmaggi viya jalabalākā viya cānu mānikaṃ, yantu paṭipada vuttaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ paccakkhasiddhaṃ, paccakkhānumānesu ca paccakkhambalavantaraṃ pamāṇanti ato paṭipadavuttameva gayhatīti.
在中性相中,不应以单一字母形式存在。显示巴利原文
Napuṃsakaliṅge ekārena na bhavitabbanti sambandho.
他说明‘a’字母为‘内属’的原因:‘因为依于根本’。‘根本的’即指‘ṇo’(规则4-34)。他说明‘省略’为‘外属’的原因:‘因为依于后缀’。通过‘内属’等语,他指示了‘于内属与外属之中,内属的规则更有力’这一原则。‘aṅga’一词意为‘部分’;‘ante’一词为第七格义;‘aṅge bhavam’即‘内属’,此为依所释义构成的数词复合词,据‘eonama vaṇṇe’(1-37)规则而有‘atta’与‘rāgama’的变化。‘aṅgato bahi’即‘外属’,此为据‘payyapābahitiro purepacchā vā pañcamyā’(3-5)规则构成的非数词复合词。在此,‘内属’与‘外属’并非意指‘属于部分者’为内属,而是指‘依于内属的作用’为内属;也非意指‘从部分之外而有的集合体’为外属,而是指‘依于外属的作用’为外属。正如当床铺发出了声音时,人们说‘床铺在响’,此处也是如此。因此,即使在数词复合词中,亦有性、格、数的差异,例如‘antaraṅgo, antaraṅgā’。此非数词复……显示巴利原文
Akārassantaraṅgatte kāraṇamāha-‘pakatinissitattā’ti, pakatiyā idaṃ pākataṃ ‘‘ṇo’’ti (4-34) ṇo, lopassa bahiraṅgatte kāraṇamāha-‘paccayanissitattā’ti, antaraṅgeccādinā ‘‘antaraṅgabahiraṅgesvantaraṅgavidhi balavā’’ti paribhāsamupalakkheti, aṅgasaddo-vayavavācī, ante saddo sattamyatthe, aṅge bhavamantaraṅgaṃ vibhatthyatthe-saṅkhyasamāso ‘‘eonama vaṇṇe’’ti (1-37) attaṃ rāgamo, aṅgato bahi bahiraṅgaṃ ‘‘payyapābahitiro purepacchā vā pañcamyā’’ti (3-5) asaṅkhyasamāso, atra cāntaraṅgaṃ bahiraṅganti nāṅgebhavamantaraṅgaṃ, apitvantaraṅganissitaṃ kāriyamantaraṅgaṃ, nāpyaṅgato bahibhūto samudāyo bahiraṅgaṃ, kintu bahiraṅganissitaṃ kāriyambahiraṅgaṃ yathā mañcanissitesu saddāyantesu ‘mañcā saddāyantī’tyuccate taṃ viyeti atoyevā saṅkhyasamāsepi liṅgavibhattivacanantarayogo ‘antaraṅgo antaraṅgā’ti, saṅketiko hyayamasaṅkhyasamāso, na pubbapadatthappadhāno, yathā-paccakkhassākkhanissitattāvabodhatthaṃ ‘akkhamakkhampati vattate’ti vicchāya-masaṅkhyasamāsepi kate paccakkha ñāṇassākkhanissitattañāpanatthaṃ saṅketavasena kato-yamasaṅkhya samāso, na pubbapadatthappadhānoti‘paccakkho paccakkhā’ti liṅgavibhatti vacanantarayogo, tathevāya-mantaraṅganissito-yaṃ samudāyanissitoti ñāpanatthaṃ saṅketavasena kato-yamasaṅkhyasamāsoti liṅgavibhattivacanantarayogo na virujjhate, athavā antaramaṅgamassa kāriyassātthīti ‘‘saddhāditva’’ (4-84) tathā bahiraṅganti, antaraṅgañca bahiraṅgañca antaraṅgabahiraṅgāni, tesvantaraṅgo balavāti. Antaraṅga kāriyassa balavattaṃ sādhetuṃ ‘sabbapaṭhamaṃ vidheyyattā’tiādi vuttaṃ, idampana antaraṅgakāriyassa balavabhāvasādhane kāraṇaṃ na hoti, antaraṅgattā balavabhāvoyeva hi sabbapaṭhamaṃ vidheyyatta kāraṇaṃ, tathā cāha-‘yo lopato akārassa paṭhamameva bhavane kāraṇamāha antaraṅgattā akārassā’ti, tasmā nāyaṃ pāṭho ghaṭate, antaraṅgabalavabhāvasādhanassa pana lokato icchitattā ayamevatthe pāṭho ghaṭate’’antaraṅgameva kāriyambalavaṃ loke tathādiṭṭhattā, tathā hi loko pātovā’’tyādi, loke tathādiṭṭhattāti antaraṅgabalavabhāvassa loke evaṃ vakkhamānanayena diṭṭhattā, athavā kenaci vidhurappaccayopanipātena kāraṇave kallena vā kadāci kattumasakkuṇeyyattepi antaraṅgassa avassaṃ vidheyyattaṃ dassetumāha sabbapaṭhamaṃ vidheyyattā’ti, satisambhaveti nimittassānupahatattā kāriyassa sambhave sati.
因为已说了‘ivaṇṇassa’(关于i音),所以在‘ye passivaṇṇassā’此处,即是指已说了‘ivaṇṇassa’(关于i音)。显示巴利原文
Ivaṇṇassāti vuttattāti ‘ye passivaṇṇassā’’ti ettha ivaṇṇassāti vuttattā.
即使在性、数的差别中,由于没有变化,所以“不变词、前缀、小品词”是前代师长的称呼。没有数目时,那些被称为“非数”的,说为“单一”等;说为“一、多”等,是因为在数目差别中,诸“si”等语尾如何能从非数中产生呢?怀着这样的意图,说“如何从非数中有si等语尾的生起”。接着,如果从非数中si等语尾不能生起,那么像“uccaṃ rukkhassa”这样的例子中,由于数目存在,si等语尾必定存在,因此说“在数目存在时”等。以“否则”等开示注释文句的意趣。“这些语尾的生起有什么必要,以至于从非数中它们的生起不被推知?”怀着这样的疑问,说“如果那存在”等。因为如果si等语尾不生起,那么像“uccaṃ”等非数词就没有词性,因此,在“yo”等词之后,对于后面的“tumha、amha”等词,带有语尾的“vo、no”等形式,作为以词为因的作用就不会有,像“uccaṃ vo, uccaṃ no”这样的用例就不能成立。但如果si等语尾生起,即使它们被省略,由于词性的成就正是基于它们的生起,词性得以成立,以词为特征的作用也就得以成立,这是其中的意趣。对此,其他人认为:在想要表达“tassaṃ sālāyaṃ”时,为了能说成“tatra sālāyaṃ”,根据“由于是不变词,si等语尾……”(巴利语法规则引用)这条规则,规定了对不变词之后的阴性āp后缀也进行省略,因此他们说“从非数”等。这是不合理的,意思是规定āp后缀的省略是不合理的。那么,这里āp后缀是根据什么规则来规定的,以至于连它的省略也被教导?如果说是根据“在阴性中……”(3-26)这条规则,这也不成立,因为阴性中的āp后缀是针对有数目的事物而规定的,而非数词没有性。因此,从非数中āp后缀的生起根本不存在,所以规定āp后缀的省略是多此一举。实际上,“在阴性中”(3-26)这一表述是以属性为主导的教导,在具有阴性性质的事物上,规定āp后缀等。像“tassaṃ sālāyaṃ(在这个意义中)tatra”这样的非数词,是在具有阴性性质的事物上使用的,因此,从这个si语尾,必定会有āp后缀,所以必须规定āp后缀的省略——如果有人这样认为,针对他,说“即使”等。如果承认“有特殊说明”,那么正在使用的这个非数集合体,以及“表述正在使用”这两者都被看到。为了成立“在阴性中”这一表述是以属性为主导,说“因为āp后缀等是在具有阴性性质的事物上”。由于“tatra”这个非数词是在“sālāyaṃ”上使用的,说“并且在具有阴性性质的事物上”。这也并非以成就的形式在使用,这是其中的关联。如果这也以成就的形式在使用,那么阴性性质又从何确定呢?因此说“阴性性质的确定”等。现在,为了引用胜者佛陀的教言,彰显其合理性,说“即使有人”等。“即使”等是胜者佛陀的教言。“它的”指阴性性质的。词义就是阴性性质。与“即使有人”相关联。由于意义可以理解,所以没有使用“iti”一词。“它的不合理”意思是,对于这样主张的人,胜者佛陀的教言是不合理的。为什么?说“因为这样”等。如果阴性性质是句义,以阴性词缀来消除,那么像“sālāyaṃ”等词,由于期待其他词,在“tatra”等词中,阴性性质就会被认知,这是其中的意思。但实际上并非如此被认知,这是其中的深意。为了阐明已经说过的意义,说“例如”等。“aviddasu ayaṃ”是譬喻,意为“智者”。“aviddasu ayaṃ”在这两处,为了消除单数语尾而造作的同一个单一性,被认知为完全不期待其他词,这是其中的意思。为了表明不能这样说:“仅仅因为与具有阴性性质的‘sālā’等词处于同格关系,‘tatra’这个词就生起āp后缀”,说“即使同格关系”等。即使同格关系,即与具有阴性性质的“sālā”等词的同格关系,也不是āp后缀等的因,这是其中的关联。显示巴利原文
Liṅgavacanabhedepi byayarahitattā abyayavantaupasaṅganipātānaṃ pubbācariyasaññā, asatī saṅkhyā yesantyānyasaṅkhyānītyāha- ‘ekatte’ccādi, ekānekesūti vuttattā saṅkhyāvisese vidhīyamānāsyādayo kathamasaṅkhyehi uppajjitumussahante iccāsayenāha- ‘kathamasaṅkhyehi syādīnaṃ sambhavo’ti. Atha nissaṅkhyehi hotusyādīnamasambhavo uccaṃ rukkhassiccādotu saṅkhyāsambhave bhavitabbameva syādīhiccāha-‘saṅkhyāsambhaveve’ccādi. Vuttiganthassādhippāyaṃ vivarati ‘aññathe’ tyādinā, kimesamuppattiyampayojanaṃ yenāsaṅkhyehi taduppatti no-numīyate ccāsaṅkiyāha-‘tassañca satiya’ntyādi, asati hi syādīnamuppattiyamuccamādīnamasaṅkhyānampadattaṃ natthīti yo ādīsu padasmā paresaṃ tumhāmhasaddānaṃ savibhattīnaṃ vonoādikaṃ padanimittaṃ kāriyaṃ na siyāti ‘uccaṃ vo, uccaṃ no’tiādayo payogā na sijjhanti, sati tu syāduppattiyaṃ luttesupi tesu padattanipphattiyāyeva taduppattito padatte siddhe padalakkhaṇaṃ kāriyaṃ sijjhatevāti bhāvo. Parehi ettha ‘tassaṃ sālāya’nti vacanicchāyaṃ ‘tatra sālāya’nti yathā siyāti ‘‘abyayatvā syādino’’ti (pā, 2-4-82) abyayato parassitthiyamāppaccayassāpi lopo vihito, tenāha- ‘asaṅkhyehi’ccādi, tadayuttanti āppaccayassa lopavidhāna mayuttaṃtyattho. Atha kenātra āppaccayo vidhīyate yenāssāpi lopo-nusāsīyate ‘‘itthiyamatvā’’ti (3-26) ce netadatthi, itthiyamāppaccayassa vidhānato-saṅkhyānañcāliṅgattā, tasmā asaṅkhyehi āppaccayassa sambhavoyeva natthītyanatthakamāppaccayassa lopavacananti nānatthakaṃ itthiyanti (3-26) hi guṇippadhāno niddeso itthattavati āppaccayādayo vidhīyante ‘tassaṃ sālāya (micce tasmiṃ padatthe) tatre’ti asaṅkhyamidamitthattavati vattate, tasmā siyāye vetasmā āppaccayotyavassamāppaccayassa lopo vidheyyoti yo maññate, tampati āha-‘yadīpi’ccādi, visesābhidhānātyupagame vatta mānoyamasaṅkhyasamudāyo‘niddeso vattate’ti cobhayamikkhate, itthiyanti niddesassa guṇippadhānattaṃ sādhetuṃ ‘itthattavati hi āppaccayādayo’tiāha, tatretīmassāsaṅkhyassa sālāyaṃ vattanato āha- ‘itthattavati cā’ti, ayampasiddhirūpena na vattateti sambandho, yadi ayampasiddhirūpena vattate, kuto carahi itthattāvasāyotyāha- ‘itthattāvasāyo’ccādi. Idāni jinindabuddhivacanamānīya tassā yuttattamubbhāvayitumāha- ‘yopyāhi’ccādi, yadīpiccādi jinindabuddhivacanaṃ, tassāti itthattassa, padattho ca itthattaṃ siyāti yopyāheti sambandho, gammamānatthattā itisaddāppayogo, tassāyuttanti tassevaṃ vādino jinindabuddhino vacanamayuttaṃtyattho, kutoccāha- ‘evaṃ hi’ccādi, yadi itthattassa vākyatthatā itthippaccayanivattikatā, evaṃ sati sālāyamiccādisaddantarāpekkhā itthattappatīti tatretyādīsu siyāti attho, neva tathā patīyatīti bhāvo, vuttamevatthaṃ phuṭayitumāha- ‘tathāhi’ccādi, aviddasuayanti diṭṭhanto paññāso, aviddasu ayanti ubhayatrāpyatrekavacanasissa nivattiyā kataṃ yamekattaṃ, taṃ saddantarādyanapekkhameva patīyatetyattho, itthatta vuttinā sālādisaddena sāmānādhikaraṇyaṃ tatretyetassāti etāvatā āppaccayo uppajjatīti ca na sakkā vattunti dassento āha-‘samānādhikaraṇattampi’ccādi, samānādhikaraṇattampīti (itthi) vuttinā sālādisaddena sāmānādhikaraṇyampi, āppaccayādīnaṃ nāṅganti sambandho.
“eva”一词被延续下来。由词根等组成的、具有一个意义的集合体,称为“ekattha”(一义)。为了说明“对此ekattha词,其生起的因由是ī等词缀的规则”,故说“ekatthatā īyādividhāna”(一义性是ī等词缀的规则)。“īyādivutti”意为ī等词缀的作用,即当有ī等词缀的规则时。所谓“samāsato”,是指通过复合词的方式。正是依据“dissantaññepi paccayā”(4-120)这条经句。显示巴利原文
Evāti anuvattateeva, ekottho yassa pakatyādisamudāyassa so ekattho ‘assa cekatthasaddassa pavattinimittaṃ īyādi vidhānantyāha- ‘ekatthatā īyādividhāna’nti, īyādivuttiyanti vattanaṃ vutti īyādīnaṃ vutti, īyādividhāne satityattho, samāsatoti samāsitā, tenevāti ‘‘dissantaññepi paccayā’’ti (4-120) sutteneva.
120. 前;先前。显示巴利原文
120. Pubba
当此处使用了“adhi”一词时,正因为通过它已经表达了格位含义,所以不使用第七格。当使用第七格时,则不用“adhi”一词。因此,应当以各自的词来显示分解,故说“itthīsu kathā pavattā”(关于女性,谈论生起)。从“itthi”一词产生第七格的原因,说为“因为同格关系”,意思是与“adhi”一词意义相同。显示巴利原文
Yadā cātrādhisaddappayogo tadā teneva vibhatyatthassa vuttattā na sattamī payujjate, yadā sattamī, na tadādhisaddo, tenā sakapadeneva viggaho evaṃ dassanīyoti āha- ‘itthīsu kathā pavattā’ti, itthisaddato sattamībhavane kāraṇamāha- ‘taṃsamānādhikaraṇattā’ti, tena adhisaddena samānatthattāti attho.
121. 从“na”开始。显示巴利原文
121. Nāto
因此,此“非命令”即是命令本身的替代;“非第五”是指排除第五格。此非命令替代在别处被制定时,因第五格已被禁止,故由禁止第五格,它自身也自然地受禁止,所以说“这是对替代本身的禁止”。而“nāto”这个对省略的禁止,是前文所说,与此处的禁止无关——这是句法上的关联。那么,为何“非第五”是与替代本身相关联,而非与对省略的禁止相关联呢?他引释规说:“对紧邻者,或有制定,或有禁止。”此处“antara”一词虽有多义,但这里取其“中间、间隔”义,故“无间隔”即是紧邻;若仅禁止间隔,则无意义,因此“紧邻”用来表示对间隔中所生制定与禁止的否定,如“紧邻的村庄”等用法。然而,就所见而言,并无“中间有间隔”的构词,而经中也见“紧邻”可指二者之一,故释规中的“紧邻者”用单数。“iti”即表此义:依此释规,与替代相关联。“tena”即依前述释规之力,与替代相关联的理由,正是这个理由。“alopo”即对省略的禁止,此义由义力所得,因为要制定二义,故有两句话:其中“nāto”是表禁止制定的一句,“amapañcamiyā”是第二句。显示巴利原文
So ca amādeso, ādesassevāti aṃādesasseva, apañcamiyāti pañcamiṃ vajjetvā. Aññatra vidhīyamāno-yamamādeso pañcamiyampaṭisiddhattā pañcamiyā paṭisedhena sayampi paṭisiddho nāma hotītyāha ‘ādesassevāyaṃ paṭisedho’ti, lopapaṭisedhassa ‘nāto’ti pubbavākyena vuttassa ayampaṭisedho neti sambandho, atha kathamidamapañcamyātyamādesenevātisambandhati na lopa paṭisedhenāti paribhāsamāha-‘anantarassa vidhi vā hoti paṭisedho vā’ti, ettha antarasaddassānekatthattepīhāntarāḷavācīti na vijjate antarammajjhamassetyanantaro, antarāḷamattapaṭisedhe payojanaṃ natthītyantarāḷagatassa vidhino paṭisedhassa cābhāvānantarotyupa carīyate anantarā gāmātyādi viya, diṭṭhatte pana majjhassa na vijjate-ntara mesanti viggahe suttepyanantarassa vidhānantarassāpi diṭṭhattā dvinnamekopyanantarotyuccate, tenevānantarassāti paribhāsāyameka vacanaṃ, itisaddo idamatthe, iti imāya paribhāsāyādesenābhisambandhatītyattho, tenāti yathāvuttaparibhāsāya vasena, yena kāraṇenādesenābhisambandhati tenātyattho, alopoti lopa paṭisedho, sāmatthiyāladdhanti dvinnamatthānaṃ vidhānāya dve vākyāni bhavanti, tatra ‘nāto’tīdaṃ paṭisedhavidhāyakamekaṃ vākyaṃ, ‘amapañcamiyā’ti dutiyamamādesassa, tatrāpañcamiyātyādesenevāti sambandhati, vuttavidhānā na lopapaṭisedhena, tathāsatyamapañcamiyātidaṃ vākyaṃ yadi na visesatthamālambate tamantarenānupapattito-ññathā kintyanenātthabalena laddhanti attho, alopoti jotetīti sambandho, vākyabhedena vivaraṇaṃ kataṃ, na ekavākyattenāti byatireko ekavākyatāyañhi kāriya dvayassapi pañcamiyampaṭisedho siyā ‘pañcamiṃ vajjetvā taṃ kāriyadvayaṃ veditabba’nti, yadipi siddhāti sambandho, yena nāppattiyātyanena ‘‘yena nāppatte vidhirārabbhate, tassa bādhanambhavatī’’ti mamparibhāsamupalakkheti, kimatthamihāyaṃ paribhāsā paṭhyate iha satthe-pavādā ussagge bādhanteti niyamo, tatra cussaggā duvidhā niyatappattayo aniyatappattayo ceti, ye sabbatthāpavādavisayampavisanti, te niyatappattayo vuccante, ye kvacidevāpavādavisayamavagāhante, te aniyatappattayo vuccante, evaṃ duvidhesussaggesu ye-niyatappattayo, tesameva bādhanamicchīyate, na niyatikānaṃ, tena tappadassanatthamayamparibhāsā paṭhyateti, yenetyussaggassa niddeso, neti paṭisedhavācī nipāto, appatte asamphuṭṭhe visaye ityajjhāhāriyaṃ, yena ussaggena nāppatte patteeva samphuṭṭheeva visayetyattho… ‘dve paṭisedhā pākatamatthaṃ gamentī’ti katvā, vidhīyatīti, paṭisedho vidhānañca, ārabbhate vidhī
此即“yate paṭhyate”之义。由此显示例外规则的制定。“tassa”指前述通则,被例外所破除。“yena tvappatte visaye ārabbhate tassa bādhanaṃ na bhavatī”意为:若某通则于未到达之境被制定,则它不被破除。何以故?因无余地故。也就是,若通则已摄尽一切境,则例外岂能有他境?故因无余地,例外不破彼通则。若某通则未遍入一切例外境,仅部分未至,则它不被破除,故说“它不被破除”。在“pañcapūlimānaye”中,“五束”是持业释复合词,如“nadāditovī”(3-27)所示,“samāhāro”即聚集,聚集也有状态义,故说“即使以状态为主”,束是附属之物。显示巴利原文
Yate paṭhyatetyattho, anenāpavādavidhindasseti, tasseti ādoyeneti niddiṭṭhassaussaggassabādhanambhavatyapavādena, yena tvappatte visaye ārabbhate tassa bādhanaṃ na bhavatītyattho, kutoti ce anavakāsattā, tathāhi yadi ussaggena sabbo visayo gahito siyā, ko-pavādassaañño visayo siyā, tasmā anavakāsattā (na) apa (vāde) pana tassa bādhanambhavatītyavaseyaṃ, yena tussaggena koci devāpavādavisayo-nuppattosiyā, nasabbo, tampati sāvakā sattā tambādhateti vuttaṃ hoti, ‘pañcapūlimānaye’tyatra pañcannaṃ pūlānaṃ samāhāroti visesanasamāso ‘‘nadāditovī’’ (3-27) samāharaṇaṃ samāhāroti samāhārassapi bhāvarūpattā āha ‘bhāvappadhānattepī’ti, guṇabhūtadabbāni pūlāni.
经中“anitthiyanti”这一禁止语有何用意?因为此词本身即以非阴性相标示,故作意思惟后说“nāmaggahaṇe”等。在“摄受名相时,即使有性别特征之名亦被摄受”这一释规中,此处“有性别特征之名”,指在经中以某种性别标示之外,另具其他特征之名。凡依于词之共相处,摄受名相时,即使有性别特征之名亦被摄受,其意趣在于:共相不包含一切差别。正是此“anitthiyanti”一语,作为能令知者,即是先得而后禁:当有阴性可得之时,方作“非阴性”之禁止,故此“anitthiyanti”禁止语本身便令知晓这一释规。由此显示,此释规乃由义力而得。显示巴利原文
Sutte anitthiyanti kimatthiya (manena) paṭisedhavacanena, yato imassetvevānitthiliṅgena niddesoti manasikatvā āha-nāmaggahaṇe’iccādi, ‘‘nāmaggahaṇe liṅgavisiṭṭhassāpi gahaṇa’’nti paribhāsāyaṃ, tattha liṅgena sutte niddiṭṭhato aññena kenaci visiṭṭhaṃ nāmaṃ liṅgavisiṭṭhaṃ, tassa, yattha saddasāmaññasannissayanaṃ, tattha nāmaggahaṇe satiliṅgavisiṭṭhassāpi gahaṇaṃ hoti… sāmaññe sabbavisesānuppave satotyadhippāyo, idamevāti anitthiyanti vacanameva, ñāpakanti patti pubbako paṭisedho, so itthiyampattiyaṃ sati anitthiyanti kato siyāti anitthiyanti paṭisedhavacanamevemaṃ paribhāsaṃ ñāpetīti attho, iminā imissā paribhāsāya sāmatthiyaladdhataṃ dasseti.
‘anapuṃsakassāti’为排除释,即‘anapuṃsakassā’中的‘nañ’词,于此是排除义。显示巴利原文
Anapuṃsakassāti pariyudāsoti anapuṃsakassāti ettha nañsaddassa pariyudāso-tthotyattho.
129. 「massā」形式显示巴利原文
129. Massā
以‘tanneti’等为例,意在指出释规于某些处并非恒常适用。显示巴利原文
Tannetiādinā katthaci paribhāsāvatiraniccāti sūceti.
130. 「kevā」形式显示巴利原文
130. Kevā
“‘Hotu sito-ññatrake sati sādeso, simhi tu kappaccayā paṭhamameva kato massa sādesoti tappaccaye sati “kevā”ti kiṃ sāmaññena sādesavidhānena’——有人生起如是疑惑后,为彰显此经在制定通称规则时所说通称之效果,而说‘kenekatthatāyaṃ’等。‘kenekatthatāyaṃ’意为:在与kappaccaya结合的ṇādi等表述中,由于前分并非词,即非词分不具有词性,故依‘ekatthatāyaṃ’(2-119)这一具有成就词性的语尾变化,反而缺失了词性,因而词性缺失;以词之成就为因,即基于词得以成就之因。‘无因则无果’这一法则表明:因、缘、理由为同义词;因不存在即是无因;无因即意味着因已灭去;果由因生,即是果法,或因中所含者为果;若因不存在,由彼因所生之果亦不存在。正如伞为因,伞影随伞之消失而不存;灯为因,灯灭时,依灯而有的见亦不显现。同样,……”显示巴利原文
Hotu sito-ññatrake sati sādeso, simhi tu kappaccayā paṭhamameva kato massa sādesoti tappaccaye sati ‘kevā’ti kiṃ sāmaññena sādesavidhānene tyāsaṅkiya suttassa sāmañña vidhāne phalaṃ dassetuṃ ‘kenekatthatāyaṃ’tyādimāha, kenekatthatāyanti kappaccayena saha ṇādivuttiyaṃ, pubbabhāgassāti asubhāgassa padattābhāvāti ‘‘ekatthatāyā’’ti (2-119) vibhattiyā padattasādhikāyāpagamena padattābhāvā, padasaṅkhāranibandhanoti pada siddhi hetuko, ‘‘nimittābhāve nemittikassāpyabhāvo’’ti ñāyassāyamattho ‘‘nimittaṃ kāraṇaṃ hetūtyanatthantaraṃ, nimittassa abhāvo nimittābhāvo, tasmiṃ nimittābhāve hetuvināsetyattho, nimittā āgato nemittiko, phalabhūto dhammo, nimitte bhāvo vā nemittiko, nimittassābhāve taṃ hetuto pavattassa nemittikassa phalassāpyabhāvo bhavatī’’ti, tathāhi chattanimittachāyā chattāpāyena bhavati, padīpanimittadassanaṃ padīpāpāye na bhāti, tathehāpi nimittato pavattānaṃ nimittābhāve abhāvoyeva yutti māti maññate, aññatracāti sito aññatra ca.
131. 「tata」形式显示巴利原文
131. Tata
为舍弃这些词中的字母t,故说“tatassa”。显示巴利原文
Tyaetānaṃ takārassa pariccāgāya ‘tatassā’ti vuttaṃ.
132. 「ṭasa」形式显示巴利原文
132. Ṭasa
于“imissāya”等词中,依“ssaṃ ssā ssāye”等规则(2-52)而有i;又依“tadādesā te viya hontī”这一通则,既然可以取用ssāya等替代形式,为何还要刻意取用ssāya等形式?岂非为使经文更受尊重?——如此质疑后,便说“ssāyādiggahaṇa”等。为表明“vutti”即论书已被阐述,故说“nanu ce”等。应说“ṭasasmāsminnannāsvimassa ca”,为也取用nama等。显示巴利原文
Imissāyātyādīsu ‘‘ssaṃ ssā ssāye’’tyādinā (2-52) i, ‘‘tadādesā te viya hontī’’ti paribhāsato sādyādesīnaṃ gahaṇāssāyādesādīnaṃ gahaṇasambhavepi kiṃ ssāyādiggahaṇe na suttagurukaraṇene tyāsaṅkiya‘ssāyādiggahaṇa’miccādi, vutti gantho vuttoti dassetumāha-‘nanu ce’tyādi, ṭasasmādikaṃ ‘ṭasasmāsminnannāsvimassa cā’ti vattabbaṃ, namādīnampi vidhiggahaṇāya , tassā
被替代词的替代形式,即“tadādesa”;对此、对此被替代词的取用,即“taggahaṇa”;依此。显示巴利原文
Desino ādeso tadādeso, tassa, tassa ādesino gahaṇaṃ taggahaṇaṃ, tena.
134. 「duti」形式显示巴利原文
134. Duti
“aññathā”指:不依师长的教导,而以另一种简易的方式解说时。由于是依单一语尾变化所标示,即依“dutiyāyossa”这一单一语尾变化所标示。应知:从“aññathā”等开始,至“nekadeso”这一说法为止,已显示了“na tvekavibhattiyuttānaṃ”这一通则的部分意趣。而“etadevānuvattatī”一句,则显示了“ekayoganiddiṭṭhānampekadeso'nuvattate”这一规则;在通则中,其关联是:依单一语尾变化结合者,其一部分不随之转起。“ñāpetī”意为:如前一般,随力令人了知。显示巴利原文
Aññathāti guruniddesamakatvā aññena lahuppakārena niddisane sati, ekavibhattiniddiṭṭhattāti‘dutiyāyossā’ti ekavibhattiyā niddiṭṭhattā, aññathātiādinā nekadesotivacanapariyantenetena ‘na tvekavibhattiyuttāna’nti paribhāsekadesassa adhippāyo pakāsitoti ñātabbaṃ, etadevānuvattatītyanena tu ‘‘ekayoga niddiṭṭhānampekadeso-nuvattate’’tīmassa, ekavibhattiyuttānaṃ ekadeso nānuvattateti yojanā paribhāsāyaṃ, ñāpetīti pubbe viya sāmatthiyena ñāpeti.
139. 非其他显示巴利原文
139. Nāññaṃ
由于遮止了非主要者,故sabba等词应依“tadantavidhi”规则来处理。否则,若采用sabba等词,又怎会有piyasabba等词的过失?正因如此,才遮止非主要者,由此而有“paramasabba”等词。为了显示此理,故说“appadhānappaṭisedho”等。显示巴利原文
Appadhānappaṭisedhato sabbādīnaṃ tadantavidhinā bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā hi sabbādiggahaṇe ko pasaṅgo piyasabbādīnaṃ, yato appadhānappaṭisedho, karīyate tena paramasabbeiccādi hotīti dassetumāha-‘appadhānappaṭisedho’iccādi.
“yattha”指:在某一作者或工具中。为说明作者中第三格的成立,而说“karoti”等。“karotimhi”指:当领会到“做”(kar-词根)时。应读作“māsena katā”……因为应说“māsena katānaṃ pubbānaṃ”。“pubbabhāve”指:在先前存在中,月为工具。但此处意为:以月为工具而成为先前存在者。因此,此处亦应读作“bhavantī”。显示巴利原文
Yatthāti yasmiṃ kattari karaṇe vā, kattari tatiyāsiddhimāha-‘karoti’ccādi, karotimhi karadhātumhi gammamāne, māsena katāti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ… māsena katānaṃ pubbānanti vattabbattā, pubbabhāveti pubbabhavane māsassa karaṇattaṃ, ettha tu māsena karaṇabhūtena pubbabhūtānanti attho, tenevetthāpi bhavantīti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
141. 四处。显示巴利原文
141. Cattha
此处的“义”即是“四义”,这是对复合词的指称;此处“四义”可能出现,但并非一切情形都落在四义复合词的范围内,因此经文应如此解读。显示巴利原文
Cassa attho cattho, soyevāti ettha samāsassa parāmāso, cattho ettha sambhavati kintu sabbādi na catthasamāsavisayoti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ.
为何以“增长之不存在”这一读法作多种安排?正是为了表达其本义,才制作了“如sumedha等无增长”的组群读法。以“金”声取“金所造”之义,故说“金所造者”;以“装扮”声取头饰之网,这些即是衣、布,因其相似性;即使是在自身义中,也随所来之义而存在,这是一种关联。在箭等所诠中,于mana等并不适用,这是连接。所谓“箭等”,指箭、声、尽等;因为aha声没有mana等的作用,所以aha声在mana等中不可见;rahas是助词,且无i音,故raha声在mana等中亦不可见,应知这是补充的关联。为了阐明在Kaccāyana中作smiṃ时所作的i音替换,以及rahati声的助词性之自性,而说“rahasī等”。在“raho声”处,应读作“raha声”。由此,因aha声无mana等的作用,且rahasī是助词,故于此mana等中。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ bahulaṃvidhānā ‘vuddhyabhāvo’ ti pāṭhena payojanaṃ yene tadatthameva ‘‘sumedhādīnamavuddhi ce’’ti gaṇapāṭho kato, hemasaddena hemamayāni gahitānyabhedenatyāha- ‘hemamayānī’ti, kappana saddena sīsālaṅkārajālāni gayhanti, tāniyeva vāsasāni paṭā taṃsarikkhatāya, sakatthepi yathāgamambhavantīti sambandho, bāṇādīsu abhidheyyesu manādīsu na paṭṭhīyantīti yojanā, bāṇādīsuti bāṇa saddakkhayādīsu, ahasaddassa manādikāriyāsambhavā ahasaddo manādīsu na daṭṭhabbo, rahasīti nipātattā ikārassa ca asabbhavā rahasaddo ca manādīsu na daṭṭhabboti sajjhāhāro sambandho veditabbo, ikārassa kaccāyane smino karīyamānassa ikārādesassa ca, rahatisaddassa nipātattaṃ sabhāvato pakāsetuṃ ‘rahasītyādi’māha, rahosaddeti ettha rahasaddoti pāṭho-vagantabbo, tenāti yena ahasaddassa manādikāriyāsambhavo rahasītica nipāto, tena, ihamanādīsu.
当ga被理解为ga之声时,“kuto nu”等中的“bho”是复数语尾的助词;如此,则“tayojanā”得以成立。为显示这一助词性得以成立,而说“bahutte”等。显示巴利原文
Geti gasaññe pare, kuto-nuiccādo bho’iti bahuvacananto nipāto, tathāsati ‘tayojanā’ti yujjati, tañca nipātattaṃ samatthetīti dassetumāha- ‘bahutte’ccādi.
148. nt 之。显示巴利原文
148. Ntassaṃ
“成为第七格语尾”是其剩余部分。若说“nt之(末尾)”,则仅确定nt后缀本身,而非其末尾规则,故说“正是nt后缀”等。以“被听闻”故,即由耳识所取、现量所得而说;以“被推断”故,即依“对规则之特别限定——nt末尾”的相状,以名为推断智之知见而了知被称为nt末尾之义,是此中之义。显示巴利原文
Sattamyantaṃ bhavatīti seso, nanucantassāti vutte ntantuppaccayovāvasīyati, na tadantavidhīti āha- ‘ntappaccaya sseve’ccādi, sutattāti sotaviññāṇena gahitattā paccakkhattāti vuttaṃ hoti, anumitassa ‘‘vidhibbisesanantassā’’ti (1-26) liṅgato tadantasaṅkhāta atthadassanasaṅkhātaanumānaññāṇena viññātassāti attho.
“坚固之法为弓”者,即daḷhadhammā。当王等后缀被读诵时。显示巴利原文
Daḷho dhammo dhanu assa daḷhadhammā. Rājādīsvimappaccaye paṭhite
其末尾依“取后缀”这一通则而被把握,故说“以此”等。显示巴利原文
Tadanto paccayaggahaṇa paribhāsāya gayhatī tyāha- ‘iminā iccādi.
由“因缘等”一词,显示了这样的道理:“在把握因缘时,既然它已被设立,便是把握了以它为始的(整体)及其末尾。”此处,既然它已被设立,无它则不生,便以此理证知“因缘”之义,故说“在把握因缘时,既然它已被设立,便是把握了以它为始者”;而“乃至规定之末尾”这句话,则说明对末尾的把握,即“及其末尾的把握”。所谓“以它为始者”,是指以该本性差异为始的聚合;“以它为末者”,是指以该差异为末的聚合。这便是把握了此种“以它为始、以它为末”的聚合差异,而非仅仅把握末尾本身——这是要义所在。然而在这里,为了表明唯有把握末尾才是恰当的,故说“于kattari有ltuṇaka”,以此说明“以它为始”等道理。至于把握“以它为始、以它为末”之聚合的结果,应在“byajigisī”等处审察。而这一点,在“tuṃsmā lopocicchāyaṃ te”经文中将自然阐明。显示巴利原文
Paccayaiccādinā ‘‘paccayaggahaṇe yasmā so vihito tadādino tadantassa ca gahaṇa’’nti ñāyaṃ dasseti, tattha yato vihito taṃ vinā na bhavati paccayotyanena ñāyena pattoyevāttho ākhyāyate ‘paccayaggahaṇe yasmā so vihito, tadādino gahaṇa’nti, ‘‘vidhibbisesanantasse’’ti tadantaggahaṇaṃtyākhyāyate ‘tadantassa ca gahaṇa’nti, so pakativiseso ādi yassa samudāyassa so tadādi, so paccayo-nte yassa samudāyassa so tadanto, tādisassa tadāditadantasamudāyavisesassa gahaṇaṃ, na tu tadantamattassetyattho, iha tu tadantaggahaṇamevānurūpanti’ dassetumāha-‘‘kattari ltuṇakā’’ti iminā tyādi, tadāditadanta samudāyassa tu gahaṇe phalaṃ ‘byajigisī’tiādīsu daṭṭhabbaṃ, tañca ‘‘tuṃsmā lopocicchāyaṃ te’’ti (5-4) sutte sayameva vakkhati.
在迦旃延语法中,有“sakamandhātādīnañce”这一句。为了说明该词也是以lt词缀结尾,从而成就所许的义理,于是在偈颂中引述了“sakamandhātu”等。因为存在以lt结尾的mandhātu(曼度王)一词,所以“sakamandhātu”一词也以lt结尾——应如此看待这段引文中的词句关联。“彼处亦然”是指:并不仅限于作格,为了成立mandhātu一词的lt结尾,并开示“sakamandhātu”一词,故说“sabbesa”等。显示巴利原文
Kaccāyane ‘‘sakamandhātādīnañce’’ti (2-3-44) suttitaṃ, sopi ltvantoyevātyabhimatasiddhīti dassetuṃ vuttiyamudāhaṭaṃtyāha- ‘sakamandhātu’iccādi, ltvanto mandhātusaddo atthīti ‘sakamandhātu’ saddopi ltvantoti sajjhāhāro padasambandho daṭṭhabbo, tatopīti na kevalaṃ kattutova, mandhātusaddassa ltvantataṃ sādhetvā sakamandhātusaddampaṭipādetuṃ ‘sabbesa’ntiādimāha.
数量词虽然用于计数,但此处却是通过计数的途径转指可计数之物,因此说“应读作cuddasahi saṅkhyāhī(以十四数之)”。唯有十四(cuddasa)一词所表达的五等数目才是,因为此处并未将数字词当作数词来使用。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhyāsaddo yadīpi saṅkhyāne vattate, tathāpi saṅkhyānadvārenidhasaṅkhyeyye vattatītyāha-‘cuddasahi saṅkhyāhī’ti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, cuddasasaddavacanīyāva pañcādisaṅkhyā, yato saṅkhyāsaddo neha pariggahitoti.
‘divasa’(日)一词,在加ṭi词缀时,前部元音省略,即成‘divi’。显示巴利原文
Divasato smino ṭimhi pubbasaralope divi.
181. Yonaṃ显示巴利原文
181. Yonaṃ
‘第二格之把握’是指:在‘其第二格为ne或vā’这一经句构造中,由把握‘第二格’而了知。显示巴利原文
Dutiyāggahaṇenāti ‘dutiyāyossa ne vā’tyevaṃ sutta racanāyaṃ dutiyāggahaṇena.
185. Nāmhi显示巴利原文
185. Nāmhi
‘Enādesa之不生’意指:由于nā没有发生smā形式的替换。显示巴利原文
Enādesassāsambhavāti nāssa smādesattā.
187. Gassaṃ显示巴利原文
187. Gassaṃ
“两种选择”,是指复合与非复合两种情形之规定。为揭示《迦旃延文法论》作者之说与根本规则相违,故言“据迦旃延”等。至于“阴性、阳性、中性之集合”,此处诸词的成立次第如下:当“以并列复合及第六格复合,而成阴性、阳性、中性之集合”这一规则确立后,依“复合中亦或然”(2-2-35),对阳性词尾施以am代换;再依“组末音或于组音之前”(1-42),将鼻音转成组末音。显示巴利原文
Ubhayavikappoti samāsāsamāsapakkhadvayavidhānaṃ, kaccāyanavutti kārassa vippaṭipattimāvīkattumāha-‘kaccāyane’ccādi, itthipumannapuṃsaka samūhoti etthāyantesaṃ sādhanakkamo ‘dvandachaṭṭhīhi samāse itthipumanapuṃsakasamūho’ti ṭhite ‘‘samāse ca vibhāsā’’ti (2-2-35) pumantassa amādese ‘‘vaggantaṃ vā vagge’’ti (1-42) niggahītassa vagganto.
192. puma(男性)显示巴利原文
192. Puma
“因以业格等为首,故此处亦无en代换”,是说依据“nā以业格等为首变为no”(2-80),从业格等之后,应以en代换nā,故如此说,意即此处无彼代换。显示巴利原文
Kammādittā enassāpi abhāvapakkheti ‘‘nā sse no’’ti (2-80) kammādito nāssa enādesakaraṇato vuttaṃ.
197. ime(这些)显示巴利原文
197. Ime
ādesa 谓陈说;anvādesa 谓随述,故言“anvādesa 者,对已陈说之事再行陈说”。对已陈说之事再行陈说,名为 kathitānukathana(随说已说)。然而,此处并非仅仅在后面再次发音便是 anvādesa,实则是指:同一所表之义,前词已表,复以第二词加于其上而表,方为 anvādesa。因此,于此不能成立如“令提婆达多受食,及此耶若达多”之例,原因在于中间插有某种差别关联,而对已陈说者再行陈说,即是 anvādesa 的关联义。问:如何知有差别关联?答:由“语力”而知,即若因某种差别关联,对已说者再行陈述不得成立,此即语力(文义之力);故续言“否则”等语。显示巴利原文
Ādeso kathanaṃ, anvādeso-nukathanamiccāha-‘anvādeso kathitānukathana’mīti, kathitassānukathanaṃ kathitānukathanaṃ, anena ca neha pacchā uccāraṇamattamanvādeso, kiñcarahi ekassābhidheyyassa pubbasaddena paṭipāditassa dutiyampatipādanamanvādesoti vadati, teneha na bhavati ‘devadattaṃ bhojaya, imañca yaññadatta’nti, kenaci visesantarayogena kathitassānukathanaṃ anvādesoti sambandho. Kathampana visesantarayogo gamyateccāha- ‘sāmatthiyā’ti, kenaci visesenāyoge vuttasseva punabbacanānupapajjanaṃ sāmatthiyaṃ, tenevāha- ‘aññathe’ccādi.
198. kissa(谁的)显示巴利原文
198. Kissa
“不相抵触”一句,是以“于女性词中”(3-26)的通则,说明即使在带格尾词的中间位置,加于女性词中的阴性词缀亦不相抵触。显示巴利原文
Navirujjhatīti iminā ‘‘itthiyamatvā’’ti (3-26) sāmaññena vidhānato syādyantamajjhepi itthiyampaccayo navirujjhatīti vadati.
204. 在 namhi 中显示巴利原文
204. Namhi
若问:“依于次第,以naṃ语尾之顺序亦应可得,既然如此,为何只说‘二词之二种代换,依次第’?”为消除此疑,故言“非以naṃ语尾之顺序”。更明其因:“以其无所待故”,由此显示一依止作用与一教说相应。若有所待,当如何?故言“若然”等。所待者,即依次第。如是,于他处亦可知:“虽以总类表述含摄两种naṃ形,然如‘三、四’之例,唯以分别表述,方有助于次第;因知此处意趣如是,故应唯说naṃsu。然实未如此说,由此断定:此处不待次第。”显示巴利原文
Nanu yathākkamaṃ naṃvibhattikkamenāpi sambhavati, tathāsati ‘dvinnaṃ saddānaṃ dveādesā kamene’cceva kasmā vuttaṃ tyāsaṅkiyāha ‘na naṃvibhattikkamenāpī’ti. Kāraṇamāha- ‘tassānapekkhitattā’ti, iminā nissayakaraṇamekā satthiyā yuttīti dasseti, apekkhite kathaṃ bhaveyyā tyāha- ‘yadi hi’ccādi, apekkhiti yathākkamaṃ, evamaññate ‘‘kiñcāpi jātiniddesena dvepi naṃ rūpāni gayhanti, tathāpi ‘ticatunna’nti viya byattiniddesova yathākkamopakārīyamānāna, manudesassa tathā viññayamānattāti naṃsuicceva vadeyya, na tathā vuttaṃ, tato-vasīyate ‘na yathākkamametthāpekkhita’nti.
205. nta(现在分词词尾)显示巴利原文
205. Nta
若问:“依‘取词缀之通则’,ntantūnanti取其尾词,如此则应取其尾词为作业体,如何唯取ntantū?”为消除此疑,故言“唯他们”。以听闻故,为现量;以更有力故,唯他们被取为作业体,此为关联,而非取其尾词。明其弱后,复说弱之因:“以推知故”。为证成推知,故言“以推知故”等。bhavibhattīnanti之读法更为合理,其关联为:于其尾词代换时,不作。显示巴利原文
Nanu ntantūnanti tadantā gayhanti paccayaggahaṇaparibhāsāya, tathā sati kāriyittena tadantāva gayhanti kathaṃ ntantūyevā tyāsaṅkiyāha- teyeve’ccādi, paccakkhatāyāti sutattā, balavattā teyeva kāriyittena gayhantīti sambandho, na tadantā, dubbalāti byatirekaṃ vatvā dubbalatte kāraṇamāha- ‘anumitattā’ti, anumitattaṃ sādhetumāha- ‘anumitāhi’ccādi, bhavibhattīnanti pāṭho yutta taro, tassa antādese akāreti sambandho.
在 yo 词尾中。显示巴利原文
219. Yomhi
“Yomhīti”:以第七格结尾的类别指称,依所得之义而说为“pacceka”(各别),故《五论》中云:“如何确定‘yomhīti’这一指称?”今为阐明其义,而说“paccekanti ekekasmiṃ”等。于各别“yomhi”中,因有两种替代出现的可能,且替代者亦有多种可能,故经中以复数“dvinnaṃ”作指示;而在注释中,因于各别“yomhi”中皆有“dvi”一词出现,故说“dvissaṃ”,其第二格亦为“duve dve”。显示巴利原文
Yomhīti sattamyantajātiniddesā labbhamānatthavasena ‘pacceka’nti vuttiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tenevāha pañcikāyaṃ- ‘kathamidamavasīyate yomhīti niddesā’ti, tassadāni atthampakāsetuṃ ‘paccekanti ekekasmi’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ekekasmiṃ yomhi dvinnaṃ ādesānaṃ sambhavā ādesīnampi bahuttasambhavoti sutte ‘dvinna’nti bahuvacananiddeso, vuttiyampana paccekaṃ yomhi paccekaṃ dvisaddasambhavā ‘dvissā’ti vuttaṃ, dutiyāyampi duve dve.
“Pakatavasenāti”:即依本然之力,指tumha、amha等替代词由于作用更为强劲,故不会逾越次序而存在——这是其关联。显示巴利原文
Pakatavasenāti tumhāmhānamādesānamadhikatavasena, kamamanatikkamma na bhavantīti sambandho.
迦旃延阿阇梨以“sassaṃ”(2-3-3)规则,对tumha、amha之后的第四格、第六格连同其格尾,制定了am替代,从而成就“tumhaṃ amhaṃ”等复数形式。即便对单独的自身与师长等,也出于恭敬而示现复数形式;为说明此义,说“tumhaṃ amhaṃ”等。因其不合道理,故说“tamayuttaṃ”,并以“evaṃ hi”等论证其不合理性。然而,在此教法中,为显示即使对单一对象也全然使用复数形式的成就次第,开始说“idha pana”等。显示巴利原文
Kaccāyanācariyo tumhāmhehi parāya catutthī chaṭṭhī savibhattiyā ‘‘sassaṃ’’ti (2-3-3) suttena amādesaṃ vidhāya ‘tumhaṃ amha’nti bahuvacanarūpāni sādheti… ekasmimpi attani guruādike ca gārava vasena bahuvacanarūpadassanatoti dassetumāha-tumhaṃ amha’ntiādi, tassāyuttattā ‘tamayutta’nti vatvā ayuttataṃ sādheti ‘evaṃ hi’ccādinā, imasmimpana satthe ekasmimpi sabbathā bahuvacana rūpasādhanakkamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘idha panā’tiādimāraddhaṃ.
“Nenāti”:以 na 字。即使没有像波你尼学派中那样制定“词”之定义的经文,若依词源义而将“词”理解为“有格尾等结尾者”,也会有过度适用之失,故说“由约定俗成而防过度适用”。动词连同不变词、具格成分及其修饰语,即为“句”——有人如此主张;另有人主张,单一动词即成“句”。注释者将这一切统摄为“词之聚合即是句”的立场,为彰显此义,而说“sābyaye”等。所谓“动词”,即以“ti”等结尾者;“不变词”,不计其数。动词与不变词一起、与具格成分一起、与修饰语一起,即得“句”之名——这是其义。所谓“修饰语”,是对具格成分的修饰语与对动作的修饰语的总称。“sābyayaṃ”:与不变词俱;“sakārakaṃ”:如“煮饭”、“天授煮”;“sakārakavisesanaṃ”:如“煮柔软洁白的饭”、“英俊的天授煮”;“sakiriyāvisesanaṃ”:如“柔软地煮”、“缓慢地煮”。当说“词之聚合即是句”时,这一特殊意趣也被确定,为说明此,说“vattumicchā”等。以“yathā”等,即使有显示巴利原文
Nenāti nakārena, padasaññāvidhāya kavacanābhāvepīti pāṇini yānamiva syādityādyantānaṃ padasaññāvidhāyakassa suttassa abhāvepi, anvatthavasena padanti gayhamāne atippasaṅgopi siyāti āha-‘ruḷhiyāvātippasaṅgā bhāvo’ti, ākhyātaṃ sābyayakāraka visesanaṃ vākyanti keci, ekākhyātikaṃ vākyantyapare, taṃ sabbaṃ ekato saṅgahetvā ‘padasamūho vākya’nti vuttikārena vuttanti dassetumāha- ‘sābyaye’ccādi, ākhyātaṃ tyādyantamāhu, abyayamasaṅkhyaṃ, ākhyātaṃ sābyayaṃ sakārakaṃ savisesanañca vākyesaññaṃ bhavatītyattho, visesananti kārakavisesanassa kiriyā visesanassa ca sāmaññena gahaṇaṃ, sābyayaṃ-saddhiṃ vacati, sakārakaṃ odanaṃ pacati devadatto pacati, sakārakavisesanaṃ-muduṃ visadamodanampacati, dassanīyo devadatto pacati, sakiriyāvisesanaṃ- muduṃ pacati, mandaṃ pacati, padasamūho vākyanti vutte ayampi adhippāyavisesovasīyatīti vattumāha-vattu’miccādi, yatheccādinā anekākhyāti kampi guṇappadhānabhāve nopakārato vākyamekambhavati… pada samūho vākyanti vuttattāti vadati, yathā vākyanānattanti sambandho. Ihāpīti vattumicchitatthetyādopi.
在摄取 hi 时,为避免连第五格的 hi 也被摄取,故经中说“非第五格之”。在“tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ”这一偈颂句中,“tumhehi”等词因此而不发生 vo 替代。“tumhe tiṭṭhatha nagare”:因与前句属不同语句,故无单一语句性。“tumhe viya diya dissanti amhe viya dissanti”:拆解此语,从词根“disa-pekkhaṇe”(见-观视),依“samānaññabhavantayādi tūpamānā disā kamme rīrikkhakā”(5-43)经,附加 kappa 词缀;依“nate kānubandhanāgamesū”(5-85)经,无 etta 词缀;依“syādisyādinekatthaṃ”(3-1)经,作复合;依“ekatthatāyaṃ”(2-119)经,省略格尾;依“sabbādīnamā”(3-86)经,得长音 ā,如“tumhādisānaṃ”等。显示巴利原文
Higgahaṇe pañcamīhissāpi gahaṇambhaveyyāti sutte ‘apañcamyā’ti vuttaṃ, tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakanti gāthāpāde tumhehitiādisū tattā na voādeso, tumhe tiṭṭhatha nagareti pubbavākyato vākyantarattā ekavākyatā natthi, tumhe viya diya dissanti amhe viya dissantīti viggayha ‘disa-pekkhaṇe’ iccasmā ‘‘samānaññabhavantayādi tūpamānā disā kamme rīrikkhakā’’ti (5-43) kappaccaye ‘‘nate kānubandhanāgamesū’’ti (5-85) ettābhāve ‘‘syādisyādinekattha’’nti (3-1) samāse ca ‘ekatthatāyaṃ’’ti (2-119) vibhattilope ca ‘‘sabbādīnamā’’ti (3-86) ā ‘tumhādisāna’miccādi.
当摄取了“后置替代即随后替代”这一概念时,如何了知“随后说”之义?故作是说:“将后置之说视为依前说而来。”显示巴利原文
Pacchā ādeso anvādesoti gahite kathitānukathananti kathaṃ ñāyatīti āha- ‘pacchā kathanañca kathitāpekkhanti katvā’ti.
与前者共在者,即是“有前”。显示巴利原文
Saha vijjamāno pubbo yassa so sapubbo.
237. Naca(na与ca的连声)显示巴利原文
237. Naca
所谓“前后相续持行之义”,是指为了把握以“若于村与城”等为起始而说的前后相续关系。显示巴利原文
Aparamparayogappatipatyatthanti ‘gāmanagarānaṃ cenā’tiādinā vuttassa paramparayogassa aggahaṇatthaṃ.
240. Nasā(na与sā的连声)显示巴利原文
240. Nasā
“有发辫者,谓其有发辫;彼即是多髻者”:这是表示同一意义的别词,并非如“学童”那样的通用语。若就不实生起的情形而言,这便是《“呼格或前未曾有”》(2-239)中所说的共通性,是对通用语的遮止。因此,对于此别词“多髻者”,在此《“呼格或前未曾有”》中,其指向之义就如同“提婆达多”等通用名称,亦即提婆达多等名字那样的通用语。而且在那些“提婆达多”等通用语中,如果“学童”等词带有外来词义,则两者都属非实有。由此说明,“提婆达多”一词作为别词的遮止并不存在;在“呼格或前未曾有”一语中,两者同等地现起。显示巴利原文
Jaṭā assa atthīti jaṭilo, sova jaṭilako, jaṭilakāti ekatthe nidassitavisesavacanaṃ, māṇavakāti viya na sāmaññavacanaṃ, asatte sampatteti idaṃ ‘‘āmantaṇaṃ pubbamasantaṃ vā’’ti (2-239) suttassa sāmaññatā vuttaṃ, sāmaññavacanassa paṭisedhoti iminā visesavacane jaṭilakaiccatra ‘āmantaṇaṃ pubbamasantaṃ vā’’tīmassa pattindasseti, devadattādisāmaññavacaneti devadatto devadattasaddo ādi yassa, tañca taṃ sāmaññavacanañca, tasmiṃ devadattādisāmaññavacane māṇavake māṇavakasadde parabhūte sati, ubhinnampi asatteti iminā idaṃ dīpeti ‘‘devadattāti visesavacanattā paṭisedhābhāvā pubbaparānamubhinnampi ‘‘āmantaṇaṃ pubbamasantaṃ vā’’tīdaṃ pappotī’’ti.